Dell 3333dn and 3335dn Laser MFP User`s Guide

Dell 3333dn and 3335dn Laser MFP User`s Guide
Dell 3333dn and 3335dn Laser
MFP
User's Guide
November 2009
www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Trademarks
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Reproduction of this material in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the
DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used
in this document to refer to the entities claiming the marks and names of their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names
other than its own.
Contents
Safety information...........................................................................15
Learning about the printer.............................................................17
Thank you for choosing this printer!............................................................................................................................17
Finding information about the printer........................................................................................................................17
Printer configurations........................................................................................................................................................18
Selecting a location for the printer...............................................................................................................................20
Basic functions of the scanner........................................................................................................................................21
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass................................................................................................................22
Understanding the printer control panel...................................................................................................................23
Understanding the home screen...................................................................................................................................24
Using the touch-screen buttons....................................................................................................................................25
Additional printer setup..................................................................29
Installing internal options................................................................................................................................................29
Available internal options............................................................................................................................................................ 29
Accessing the system board to install internal options.................................................................................................... 30
Installing a memory card ............................................................................................................................................................. 32
Installing a flash memory or firmware card........................................................................................................................... 34
Installing an Internal Solutions Port......................................................................................................................................... 36
Installing a printer hard disk ....................................................................................................................................................... 43
Installing a fax card ........................................................................................................................................................................ 47
Installing hardware options.............................................................................................................................................50
Installing a 550-sheet drawer ..................................................................................................................................................... 50
Attaching cables..................................................................................................................................................................51
Verifying printer setup.......................................................................................................................................................52
Printing a menu settings page................................................................................................................................................... 52
Printing a network setup page .................................................................................................................................................. 53
Setting up the printer software......................................................................................................................................53
Installing printer software ........................................................................................................................................................... 53
Updating available options in the printer driver................................................................................................................. 54
Setting up wireless printing.............................................................................................................................................55
Follow these steps to set up your printer .............................................................................................................................. 55
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network...................................................................... 55
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) ................................................................................................... 56
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)................................................................................................. 59
Installing the printer on a wired network...................................................................................................................62
Contents
2
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port...........................................65
Setting up serial printing..................................................................................................................................................67
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact.....................69
Saving paper and toner.....................................................................................................................................................69
Using recycled paper and other office papers ..................................................................................................................... 69
Conserving supplies....................................................................................................................................................................... 69
Saving energy.......................................................................................................................................................................70
Using Eco-Mode .............................................................................................................................................................................. 70
Adjusting Power Saver.................................................................................................................................................................. 71
Adjusting the brightness of the display ................................................................................................................................. 72
Setting the standard exit bin light............................................................................................................................................ 72
Reducing printer noise......................................................................................................................................................73
Loading paper and specialty media.............................................75
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type........................................................................................................................75
Configuring Universal paper settings..........................................................................................................................75
Avoiding jams.......................................................................................................................................................................76
Loading trays.........................................................................................................................................................................76
Using the multipurpose feeder......................................................................................................................................80
Linking and unlinking trays.............................................................................................................................................85
Linking trays...................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Unlinking trays................................................................................................................................................................................. 85
Assigning a custom paper type name..................................................................................................................................... 86
Changing a Custom Type <x> name ....................................................................................................................................... 86
Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................87
Paper guidelines..................................................................................................................................................................87
Paper characteristics...................................................................................................................................................................... 87
Unacceptable paper ...................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Selecting paper................................................................................................................................................................................ 88
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead........................................................................................................................... 88
Storing paper.................................................................................................................................................................................... 89
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...............................................................................................................89
Paper sizes supported by the printer ...................................................................................................................................... 89
Paper types and weights supported by the printer ........................................................................................................... 91
Paper capacities............................................................................................................................................................................... 91
Software overview..........................................................................93
Status Monitor Center........................................................................................................................................................93
Driver Profiler........................................................................................................................................................................93
Contents
3
Dell Printer Alert Utility......................................................................................................................................................93
Printing...............................................................................................95
Printing a document..........................................................................................................................................................95
Printing on both sides of the paper (duplexing)......................................................................................................95
Printing on specialty media.............................................................................................................................................96
Tips on using letterhead............................................................................................................................................................... 96
Tips on using transparencies...................................................................................................................................................... 96
Tips on using envelopes............................................................................................................................................................... 96
Tips on using labels........................................................................................................................................................................ 97
Tips on using card stock ............................................................................................................................................................... 97
Printing confidential and other held jobs...................................................................................................................98
Holding jobs in the printer .......................................................................................................................................................... 98
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows ............................................................................................... 98
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer..................................................................... 99
Printing from a flash drive..............................................................................................................................................100
Printing information pages...........................................................................................................................................101
Printing a font sample list..........................................................................................................................................................101
Printing a directory list................................................................................................................................................................101
Printing the print quality test pages......................................................................................................................................101
Canceling a print job........................................................................................................................................................102
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel ......................................................................................................102
Canceling a print job from the computer ............................................................................................................................102
Copying.............................................................................................104
Making copies....................................................................................................................................................................104
Making a quick copy....................................................................................................................................................................104
Copying using the ADF...............................................................................................................................................................104
Copying using the scanner glass ............................................................................................................................................105
Copying photos.................................................................................................................................................................105
Copying on specialty media..........................................................................................................................................105
Making transparencies................................................................................................................................................................105
Copying to letterhead.................................................................................................................................................................106
Customizing copy settings............................................................................................................................................106
Copying from one size to another..........................................................................................................................................106
Making copies using paper from a selected tray ..............................................................................................................107
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing) ..............................................................................................................107
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes...................................................................................................107
Reducing or enlarging copies ..................................................................................................................................................108
Adjusting copy quality................................................................................................................................................................109
Collating copies.............................................................................................................................................................................109
Placing separator sheets between copies ...........................................................................................................................110
Contents
4
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet ......................................................................................................................110
Creating a custom job (job build) ...........................................................................................................................................111
Pausing the current print job to make copies........................................................................................................111
Placing information on copies.....................................................................................................................................112
Placing the date and time at the top of each page ..........................................................................................................112
Placing an overlay message on each page..........................................................................................................................112
Canceling a copy job........................................................................................................................................................113
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF ...............................................................................................113
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass .........................................................................113
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed ..............................................................................................113
Understanding the copy screens and options.......................................................................................................113
Copy from........................................................................................................................................................................................113
Copy to .............................................................................................................................................................................................113
Scale...................................................................................................................................................................................................114
Darkness...........................................................................................................................................................................................114
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................114
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................114
Collate ...............................................................................................................................................................................................114
Options .............................................................................................................................................................................................114
Improving copy quality...................................................................................................................................................116
E-mailing..........................................................................................117
Getting ready to e-mail...................................................................................................................................................117
Enabling the e-mail function ....................................................................................................................................................117
Setting up the e-mail function.................................................................................................................................................118
Configuring the e-mail settings...............................................................................................................................................118
Creating an e-mail shortcut...........................................................................................................................................118
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server ...................................................................................118
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen........................................................................................................119
E-mailing a document.....................................................................................................................................................119
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen..........................................................................................................................119
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number ......................................................................................................................119
Sending an e-mail using the address book .........................................................................................................................120
Customizing e-mail settings.........................................................................................................................................120
Adding e-mail subject and message information.............................................................................................................120
Changing the output file type..................................................................................................................................................121
E-mailing color documents...........................................................................................................................................121
Canceling an e-mail..........................................................................................................................................................121
Understanding e-mail options.....................................................................................................................................122
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................................................122
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................122
Orientation......................................................................................................................................................................................122
Contents
5
Binding .............................................................................................................................................................................................122
E-mail Subject ................................................................................................................................................................................122
E-mail File Name............................................................................................................................................................................122
E-mail Message ..............................................................................................................................................................................122
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................122
Send As .............................................................................................................................................................................................123
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................123
Advanced Options........................................................................................................................................................................123
Faxing...............................................................................................124
Getting the printer ready to fax...................................................................................................................................124
Initial fax setup...............................................................................................................................................................................124
Choosing a fax connection........................................................................................................................................................125
Connecting to an analog telephone line .............................................................................................................................126
Connecting to a DSL service .....................................................................................................................................................126
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system.....................................................................................................................................127
Connecting to a distinctive ring service ...............................................................................................................................127
Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line.........................128
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region.....................................................................................................130
Connecting to a computer with a modem..........................................................................................................................134
Enabling the fax function...........................................................................................................................................................135
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup.................................................................................................................136
Setting the date and time..........................................................................................................................................................136
Turning daylight saving time on or off .................................................................................................................................136
Sending a fax......................................................................................................................................................................137
Sending a fax using the printer control panel....................................................................................................................137
Sending a fax using the computer .........................................................................................................................................137
Creating shortcuts............................................................................................................................................................138
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................138
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen.........................................................................................139
Changing the fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server..............................................................139
Using shortcuts and the address book......................................................................................................................140
Using fax shortcuts.......................................................................................................................................................................140
Using the address book..............................................................................................................................................................140
Customizing fax settings................................................................................................................................................141
Changing the fax resolution .....................................................................................................................................................141
Making a fax lighter or darker ..................................................................................................................................................141
Sending a fax at a scheduled time..........................................................................................................................................141
Printing an incoming fax on both sides of the paper (duplexing)..............................................................................142
Viewing a fax log...........................................................................................................................................................................142
Blocking junk faxes.......................................................................................................................................................................142
Canceling an outgoing fax.............................................................................................................................................143
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning ................................................................................143
Contents
6
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory .....................................................143
Understanding fax options............................................................................................................................................143
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................................................143
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................144
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................144
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................144
Darkness...........................................................................................................................................................................................144
Advanced Options........................................................................................................................................................................144
Improving fax quality.......................................................................................................................................................145
Holding and forwarding faxes......................................................................................................................................145
Holding faxes..................................................................................................................................................................................145
Forwarding a fax ...........................................................................................................................................................................146
Scanning to an FTP address.........................................................147
Scanning to an FTP address..........................................................................................................................................147
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad ..................................................................................................................147
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number....................................................................................................147
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book ......................................................................................................148
Creating shortcuts............................................................................................................................................................148
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server.........................................................................................148
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen.............................................................................................................148
Understanding FTP options..........................................................................................................................................149
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................................................149
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................149
Orientation......................................................................................................................................................................................149
Binding .............................................................................................................................................................................................149
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................149
Send As .............................................................................................................................................................................................150
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................150
Advanced Options........................................................................................................................................................................150
Improving FTP quality.....................................................................................................................................................151
Scanning to a computer or flash drive......................................152
Scanning to a computer.................................................................................................................................................152
Scanning to a flash drive................................................................................................................................................153
Understanding scan profile options..........................................................................................................................153
Quick Setup.....................................................................................................................................................................................153
Format Type....................................................................................................................................................................................153
Compression...................................................................................................................................................................................154
Default Content.............................................................................................................................................................................154
Color ..................................................................................................................................................................................................154
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................................................154
Contents
7
Orientation......................................................................................................................................................................................154
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................154
JPEG Quality....................................................................................................................................................................................154
Darkness...........................................................................................................................................................................................154
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................155
Advanced Imaging .......................................................................................................................................................................155
Improving scan quality...................................................................................................................................................155
Understanding printer menus.....................................................156
Menus list.............................................................................................................................................................................156
Paper menu.........................................................................................................................................................................157
Default Source menu...................................................................................................................................................................157
Paper Size/Type menu ................................................................................................................................................................157
Configure MP menu.....................................................................................................................................................................157
Substitute Size menu...................................................................................................................................................................157
Paper Texture menu ....................................................................................................................................................................158
Paper Weight menu .....................................................................................................................................................................159
Paper Loading menu ...................................................................................................................................................................161
Custom Types menu....................................................................................................................................................................162
Custom Names menu..................................................................................................................................................................162
Custom Scan Sizes menu ...........................................................................................................................................................162
Universal Setup menu.................................................................................................................................................................163
Reports menu.....................................................................................................................................................................163
Network/Ports menu.......................................................................................................................................................165
Active NIC menu............................................................................................................................................................................165
Standard Network or Network <x> menus .........................................................................................................................165
Reports menu (under the Network/Ports menu) ..............................................................................................................166
Network Card menu.....................................................................................................................................................................167
TCP/IP menu ...................................................................................................................................................................................167
IPv6 menu........................................................................................................................................................................................169
Wireless menu................................................................................................................................................................................169
AppleTalk menu ............................................................................................................................................................................170
NetWare menu...............................................................................................................................................................................170
Standard USB menu.....................................................................................................................................................................171
Parallel menu..................................................................................................................................................................................172
Serial <x> menu ............................................................................................................................................................................174
SMTP Setup menu ........................................................................................................................................................................177
Security menu....................................................................................................................................................................178
Miscellaneous menu....................................................................................................................................................................178
Confidential Print menu .............................................................................................................................................................178
Security Audit Log menu ...........................................................................................................................................................179
Set Date/Time menu....................................................................................................................................................................179
Settings menu....................................................................................................................................................................180
Contents
8
General Settings menu ...............................................................................................................................................................180
Copy Settings menu ....................................................................................................................................................................186
Fax Settings menu........................................................................................................................................................................192
E-mail Settings menu ..................................................................................................................................................................202
FTP Settings menu........................................................................................................................................................................207
Flash Drive menu ..........................................................................................................................................................................210
Print Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................................215
Help menu...........................................................................................................................................................................226
Maintaining the printer.................................................................227
Cleaning the exterior of the printer............................................................................................................................227
Cleaning the scanner glass............................................................................................................................................227
Cleaning the ADF separator rollers.............................................................................................................................228
Adjusting scanner registration.....................................................................................................................................229
Storing supplies.................................................................................................................................................................230
Checking the status of supplies...................................................................................................................................230
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel..................................................................................230
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer ..........................................................................................230
Ordering supplies..............................................................................................................................................................231
Printer attached to a network ..................................................................................................................................................231
Printer attached locally to a computer .................................................................................................................................231
Replacing supplies............................................................................................................................................................231
Replacing the toner cartridge ..................................................................................................................................................231
Replacing the photoconductor kit .........................................................................................................................................233
Recycling Dell products..................................................................................................................................................236
Moving the printer to another location....................................................................................................................236
Shipping the printer.........................................................................................................................................................237
Administrative support.................................................................238
Using the Embedded Web Server...............................................................................................................................238
Checking the device status............................................................................................................................................238
Setting up e-mail alerts...................................................................................................................................................238
Viewing reports..................................................................................................................................................................239
Restoring the factory default settings.......................................................................................................................239
Clearing jams...................................................................................240
Understanding jam messages and locations..........................................................................................................240
200 and 201 paper jams.................................................................................................................................................241
202 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................243
231 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................244
Contents
9
233 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................246
234 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................246
235 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................247
240–249 paper jams.........................................................................................................................................................247
250 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................248
251 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................249
290–294 paper jams.........................................................................................................................................................250
Troubleshooting.............................................................................254
Solving basic printer problems....................................................................................................................................254
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds...................................................................254
Understanding printer messages................................................................................................................................254
Change <input src> to <Custom Type Name>..................................................................................................................254
Change <input src> to <Custom String> ............................................................................................................................255
Change <input src> to <size>..................................................................................................................................................255
Change <input src> to <type> <size>..................................................................................................................................255
Check tray <x> connection .......................................................................................................................................................255
Close door or insert cartridge...................................................................................................................................................256
Close front door.............................................................................................................................................................................256
Disk corrupted ...............................................................................................................................................................................256
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator..................................................................................................256
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.......................................................................................256
Memory full, cannot print faxes...............................................................................................................................................256
Fax memory full.............................................................................................................................................................................256
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator. .............................................................................................257
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator...............................................................................257
Some held jobs were not restored .........................................................................................................................................257
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored ......................................................................................257
57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored..................................................................................................257
Load <input src> with <Custom Type Name>...................................................................................................................257
Load <input src> with <Custom String> .............................................................................................................................258
Load <input src> with <size>...................................................................................................................................................258
Load <input src> with <type> <size>...................................................................................................................................258
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom Type Name>............................................................................................................258
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom String>.......................................................................................................................258
Load Manual Feeder with <size>............................................................................................................................................259
Load Manual Feeder with <type> <size> ............................................................................................................................259
Remove paper from standard output bin............................................................................................................................259
Restore Held Jobs? .......................................................................................................................................................................259
Unsupported USB device, please remove ...........................................................................................................................259
Unsupported USB hub, please remove.................................................................................................................................259
Unsupported disk .........................................................................................................................................................................259
Contents
10
30.yy Invalid refill, change cartridge ......................................................................................................................................259
31.yy Replace defective or missing cartridge .....................................................................................................................260
32.yy Cartridge part number unsupported by device.....................................................................................................260
34 Short paper ...............................................................................................................................................................................260
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature ...........................................................................................260
37 Insufficient memory to collate job ...................................................................................................................................260
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted..................................................................................................260
38 Memory full...............................................................................................................................................................................261
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed.......................................................................................................261
Fax failed ..........................................................................................................................................................................................261
50 PPDS font error ........................................................................................................................................................................261
51 Defective flash detected ......................................................................................................................................................261
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources .............................................................................................261
54 Standard network software error......................................................................................................................................262
54 Network <x> software error................................................................................................................................................262
55 Unsupported option in slot <x>........................................................................................................................................262
56 Parallel port <x> disabled....................................................................................................................................................262
56 Serial port <x> disabled .......................................................................................................................................................262
56 Standard USB port disabled................................................................................................................................................263
56 USB port <x> disabled ..........................................................................................................................................................263
58 Too many flash options installed ......................................................................................................................................263
58 Too many trays attached .....................................................................................................................................................263
59 Incompatible tray <x> ..........................................................................................................................................................263
61 Remove defective disk..........................................................................................................................................................264
62 Disk full .......................................................................................................................................................................................264
63 Unformatted disk....................................................................................................................................................................264
80 Routine maintenance needed ...........................................................................................................................................264
84 PC Kit life warning...................................................................................................................................................................264
84 Replace PC Kit...........................................................................................................................................................................264
88 Cartridge low............................................................................................................................................................................264
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option....................................................................................................................264
Scanner ADF Cover Open ..........................................................................................................................................................265
Scan Document Too Long .........................................................................................................................................................265
Replace all originals if restarting job......................................................................................................................................265
Paper Change: Load Tray<x> <paper type>.......................................................................................................................265
290-295.yy scanner jam..............................................................................................................................................................265
293 Replace all originals if restarting job. ............................................................................................................................265
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open ......................................................................................................................................................266
294 ADF Jam...................................................................................................................................................................................266
840.01 Scanner Disabled............................................................................................................................................................266
840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled.................................................................................................................................................266
Solving printing problems.............................................................................................................................................267
Multiple-language PDFs do not print....................................................................................................................................267
Jobs do not print...........................................................................................................................................................................267
Confidential and other held jobs do not print ...................................................................................................................268
Contents
11
Job takes longer than expected to print ..............................................................................................................................268
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper .................................................................................................269
Incorrect characters print...........................................................................................................................................................269
Tray linking does not work ........................................................................................................................................................269
Large jobs do not collate ...........................................................................................................................................................269
Unexpected page breaks occur...............................................................................................................................................270
Solving copy problems...................................................................................................................................................270
Copier does not respond ...........................................................................................................................................................270
Scanner unit does not close......................................................................................................................................................270
Poor copy quality..........................................................................................................................................................................271
Partial document or photo copies..........................................................................................................................................272
Solving scanner problems.............................................................................................................................................273
Checking an unresponsive scanner .......................................................................................................................................273
Scan was not successful .............................................................................................................................................................273
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer............................................................................................................273
Poor scanned image quality .....................................................................................................................................................273
Partial document or photo scans............................................................................................................................................274
Cannot scan from a computer .................................................................................................................................................274
Solving fax problems.......................................................................................................................................................275
Caller ID is not shown..................................................................................................................................................................275
Cannot send or receive a fax.....................................................................................................................................................275
Can send but not receive faxes................................................................................................................................................277
Can receive but not send faxes................................................................................................................................................277
Received fax has poor print quality........................................................................................................................................278
Solving option problems................................................................................................................................................278
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed ....................................................................................278
Drawers.............................................................................................................................................................................................279
Memory card ..................................................................................................................................................................................279
Flash memory card.......................................................................................................................................................................279
Hard disk with adapter................................................................................................................................................................279
Internal Solutions Port ................................................................................................................................................................280
Solving paper feed problems.......................................................................................................................................280
Paper frequently jams .................................................................................................................................................................280
Paper trays.......................................................................................................................................................................................281
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared ..............................................................................................................281
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam.........................................................................................281
Solving print quality problems....................................................................................................................................282
Isolating print quality problems..............................................................................................................................................282
Blank pages.....................................................................................................................................................................................282
Characters have jagged or uneven edges ...........................................................................................................................283
Clipped images..............................................................................................................................................................................283
Ghost images..................................................................................................................................................................................283
Gray background ..........................................................................................................................................................................284
Contents
12
Incorrect margins..........................................................................................................................................................................284
Paper curl.........................................................................................................................................................................................285
Print irregularities .........................................................................................................................................................................285
Skewed print...................................................................................................................................................................................286
Solid black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper.................................................................................286
Print is too light .............................................................................................................................................................................287
Print is too dark..............................................................................................................................................................................288
Solid color pages...........................................................................................................................................................................289
Streaked vertical lines .................................................................................................................................................................289
Streaked horizontal lines............................................................................................................................................................290
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page ...............................................................................................291
Toner rubs off.................................................................................................................................................................................291
Toner specks...................................................................................................................................................................................292
Transparency print quality is poor..........................................................................................................................................292
Uneven print density...................................................................................................................................................................293
Embedded Web Server does not open.....................................................................................................................293
Check the network connections .............................................................................................................................................293
Check the network settings ......................................................................................................................................................293
Contacting Technical Support......................................................................................................................................293
Appendix..........................................................................................294
Index.................................................................................................296
Contents
13
14
Safety information
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: See the enclosed Safety Sheet before making any cable or electrical
connection.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
Use care when you replace a lithium battery.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate
a lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to move it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury
or printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
Safety information
15
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do
not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
Safety information
16
Learning about the printer
Thank you for choosing this printer!
We've worked hard to make sure it will meet your needs.
To start using your new printer right away, use the setup materials that came with the printer, and then skim the
User’s Guide to learn how to perform basic tasks. To get the most out of your printer, read the User’s Guide carefully,
and make sure you check the latest updates on our Web site.
We're committed to delivering performance and value with our printers, and we want to make sure you're satisfied.
If you do encounter any problems along the way, one of our knowledgeable support representatives will be delighted
to help you get back on track fast. And if you find something we could do better, please let us know. After all, you
are the reason we do what we do, and your suggestions help us do it better.
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?
Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
Setup documentation—The setup documentation
came with the printer.
• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
• Loading paper
• Performing printing, copying, scanning, and faxing tasks,
depending on your printer model
•
•
•
•
User's Guide—The User's Guide is available on the
Software and Documentation CD.
Quick Reference—The Quick Reference is available on the
Software and Documentation CD under “View Additional
Documentation.”
For updates, check our Web site at support.dell.com.
Configuring printer settings
Viewing and printing documents and photos
Setting up and using printer software
Setting up and configuring the printer on a network,
depending on your printer model
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
Help using the printer software
Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software
program or application, and then click Help.
Click
to view context-sensitive information.
Notes:
• The Help installs automatically with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
Program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Learning about the printer
17
What are you looking for?
Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and technical
support:
Dell Support Web site—support.dell.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Documentation
Driver downloads
Note: Select your region, and then select your product
to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your region or country can be found on the Support Web
site.
Have the following information ready when you contact
support so that they may serve you faster:
Product upgrades
Service call and repair information
Order status
Live chat support
• Service Tag
• Express Service Code
E-mail support
Telephone support
Note: The Service Tag and Express Service Code appear
on labels located on your printer.
• Software and Drivers—Certified drivers for my printer and
Software and Documentation CD
installers for Dell printer software
• Readme files—Last-minute technical changes, or advanced
technical reference material for experienced users or
technicians
• Supplies and accessories for my printer
• Replacement cartridges
Dell Printer Supplies Web site–dell.com/supplies
You can purchase printer supplies online, by telephone,
or in select retail stores.
• Safety information for preparing to operate my printer
• Regulatory information
• Warranty information
Product Information Guide
Note: The Product Information Guide may not be
available in your country or region.
Printer configurations
Note: Printer configuration may vary depending on your printer model.
Learning about the printer
18
Basic model
1
Front door release button
2
Printer control panel
3
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
4
Standard exit bin with overhead light
5
Paper stop
6
Standard 250-sheet tray
7
Multipurpose feeder door
8
Front door
Learning about the printer
19
1
System board locks
2
Locking device
3
Ethernet port
4
USB port
Note: Use this USB port to connect the printer to the computer.
5
Fax wall connection port
Note: The Fax ports are present only when a fax card is installed.
6
Fax telephone connection port
Note: The Fax ports are present only when a fax card is installed.
7
Rear door
8
Power switch
9
Printer power cord socket
10
USB peripheral port
11
Removable protective plate
Note: The protective plate is removed when internal options are installed.
Selecting a location for the printer
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install
any options, leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
Learning about the printer
20
• Keep the printer:
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
– Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
– Clean, dry, and free of dust
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
1
Top
2
Right Side 203 mm (8 in.)
3
Rear
305 mm (12 in.)
4
Front
203 mm (8 in.)
5
Left Side
76 mm (3 in.)
254 mm (10 in.)
Basic functions of the scanner
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:
•
•
•
•
•
Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).
Note: The fax function is available on selected printer models only.
Learning about the printer
21
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
The ADF can scan multiple pages, including duplex pages. If duplex settings are selected, the ADF scans both sides
of the page automatically. When using the ADF:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
Scan sizes from 125 x 127 mm (4.92 x 5.0 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:
•
•
•
•
Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
Copy books up to 25.3-mm (1-in.) thick.
Learning about the printer
22
Understanding the printer control panel
Item
Description
1
Display
View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages.
2
Keypad
Enter numbers or symbols on the display.
3
Dial Pause
• Press
to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To field, a
Dial Pause is represented by a comma (,).
• From the home screen, press to redial a fax number.
• The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside of the
Fax menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing
4
Back
causes an error beep.
In the Copy menu, press to delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count. The
default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing numerous times.
In the Fax Destination List, press to delete the right-most digit of a number entered manually.
You can also press to delete an entire shortcut entry. Once an entire line is deleted, another
press of causes the cursor to move up one line.
In the E-mail Destination List, press to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the
character is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.
Learning about the printer
23
Item
Description
5
Home
6
Start
7
Indicator light
Press
• Press to initiate the current job indicated on the display.
• From the home screen, press to start a copy job with the default settings.
• If pressed while a job is scanning, the button has no effect.
Indicates the printer status:
•
•
•
•
8
Stop
to return to the home screen.
Off—The power is off.
Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.
Stops all printer activity
A list of options is offered once Stopped appears on the display.
Understanding the home screen
After the printer is turned on and a short warm-up period occurs, the display shows a basic screen which is referred
to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to
open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.
Note: Buttons appearing on the home screen may vary depending on home screen customization settings.
Display item
1
Copy
Description
Opens the Copy menus
Note: From the home screen, you can also access the Copy menus by pressing a number on
the keypad.
2
E-mail
Opens the E-mail menus
3
Menus
Opens the menus. These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
Learning about the printer
24
Display item
4
FTP
5
Status message bar
Description
Opens the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus
• Shows the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low.
• Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what you should do so the printer
can continue processing, such as Close door.
6
Status/Supplies
Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring
intervention. Touch it to access the messages screen for more information on the message,
including how to clear it.
7
Tips
All menus have a Tips button. Tips is a context-sensitive Help feature within the display touch
screens.
8
Fax
Opens the Fax menus
Other buttons may appear on the home screen, such as:
Display item
Description
Release Held Faxes
If this button is shown, then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously
set. To access the list of held faxes, touch this button.
Search Held Jobs
Searches on any of the following items and returns search results:
•
•
•
•
•
User names for held or confidential print jobs
Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
Profile names
Bookmark container or job names
USB container or job names for supported extensions only
Held Jobs
Opens a screen containing all the held jobs
Lock Device
This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and Device Lockout
Personal Identification Number (PIN) has been set.
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct PIN locks the
printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).
Unlock Device
This button appears on the screen when the printer is locked. The printer control panel
buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while it appears.
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct PIN unlocks the
printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Depending on your options and administrative setup, your screens and buttons may vary from those shown.
Learning about the printer
25
Sample touch screen
Button
Function
Home
Returns to the home screen
Down arrow
Opens an options screen
Left scroll decrease Scrolls to another value in decreasing order
Right scroll increase Scrolls to another value in increasing order
Left arrow
Scrolls left
Right arrow
Scrolls right
Learning about the printer
26
Button
Function
Back
Navigates back to the previous screen
Other touch-screen buttons
Button
Function
Submit
Saves a value as the new default setting
Down arrow
Moves down to the next screen
Up arrow
Moves up to the next screen
Unselected radio button
This is an unselected radio button. The radio button is gray to show it is unselected.
Selected radio button
This is a selected radio button. The radio button is blue to show it is selected.
Cancel Jobs
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings: Print,
Fax, and Network.
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:
•
•
•
•
•
Print job
Copy job
Fax
FTP
E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only
three jobs per screen. Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access
information about the job. If more than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow
appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Learning about the printer
27
Button
Function
Continue
Touch this button to accept a selection or to clear messages, and then proceed
with the job.
Cancel
Select
• Cancels an action or a selection
• Cancels out of a screen and returns to the previous screen
Opens the next related menu or menu item
Features
Feature
Description
Menu trail line:
A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature acts as a
Menusª Settingsª Copy Settingsª trail, showing the path taken to arrive at the current menu. It gives the exact
location within the menus.
Number of Copies
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item.
The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch
an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies
is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.
Attendance message alert
If an attendance message occurs which affects a function, such as copy or fax, then
a solid red exclamation point appears over the function button on the home
screen, and the red indicator light blinks.
Learning about the printer
28
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this
section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.
Available internal options
•
•
•
•
Memory cards
Firmware cards
Printer hard disk
Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
All of these options may not be available. For more information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Additional printer setup
29
Accessing the system board to install internal options
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Loosen the screws on the back of the system board a quarter turn.
Additional printer setup
30
2 Lift the front of the scanner unit to open the system board.
3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1
Flash memory or firmware card connectors
2
Fax card connector
3
Printer hard disk connector
4
Memory card connector
Additional printer setup
31
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board. To install the memory
card:
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Open the memory card connector latches.
Additional printer setup
32
4 Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges in the connector.
1
Notches
2
Ridges
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place.
Note: After the memory card is installed, make sure the memory card connector latches return to the latched
vertical position and are secure against the card.
6 Release the system board access latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
7 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if it
is moved.
Additional printer setup
33
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be
installed, but the connectors are interchangeable.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the card.
Note: Avoid touching any electrical components on the card.
Additional printer setup
34
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.
1
Plastic pins
2
Metal pins
4 Push the card firmly into place.
Notes:
• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.
5 Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
Additional printer setup
35
6 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if
it is moved.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee.
Note: Avoid touching the components on the hard disk.
Additional printer setup
36
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Note: If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must first be removed. To
remove the hard disk:
a Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer
hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch
before pulling the cable out.
Additional printer setup
37
b Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
c Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.
Additional printer setup
38
d Remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and
then remove the bracket. Set the printer hard disk aside.
4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
Additional printer setup
39
5 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes in the system board, and then press downward until the tee snaps
into place. Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely, and that the tee is seated firmly onto the system
board.
6 Install the ISP onto the plastic tee. Angle the ISP over the plastic tee, and then approach the plastic tee so that
any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage.
7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee.
Additional printer setup
40
8 Insert the long thumbscrew, into the hole closest to the white connector, and turn it clockwise enough to hold
the ISP in place. Do not tighten the thumbscrew at this time.
9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage.
10 Tighten the long thumbscrew.
Note: Do not overtighten the thumbscrew.
11 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
Additional printer setup
41
12 If a printer hard disk was previously installed, then attach the printer hard disk to the ISP. For more information,
see “Installing a printer hard disk” on page 43.
13 Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
14 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if it
is moved.
Additional printer setup
42
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
Note: Avoid touching the components on the hard disk.
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
Additional printer setup
43
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
a Using a flathead screwdriver to loosen the screws, remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk
mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and then remove the bracket.
b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the ISP, and then press downward on the printer
hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
Additional printer setup
44
To install a printer hard disk directly onto the system board:
a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the system board, and then press downward on
the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.
Additional printer setup
45
b Attach the two provided screws to secure the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
4 Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
Additional printer setup
46
5 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if
it is moved.
Installing a fax card
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the fax card.
Additional printer setup
47
3 Remove the metal cover from the fax card opening.
4 Insert the fax card, and then tighten the two screws to secure the fax card mounting bracket.
Additional printer setup
48
5 Insert the plug of the fax card interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
6 Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
7 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if
it is moved.
Additional printer setup
49
Installing hardware options
Installing a 550-sheet drawer
The printer supports one optional drawer; you can install a 550-sheet drawer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Unpack the drawer, and then remove any packing material from the outside of the drawer.
2 Remove the tray from the support unit.
1
Support unit
2
Tray
3 Remove any packing material and tape from inside the tray.
4 Insert the tray into the support unit.
5 Place the drawer in the location chosen for the printer.
Additional printer setup
50
6 Align the printer with the drawer, and then lower the printer into place.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Be sure to match the following:
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Additional printer setup
51
1
USB port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown
while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
2
Ethernet port
Verifying printer setup
• Print a menu settings page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears
toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove
the option and install it again.
• Print a network setup page to verify that your printer is correctly connected to the network. This page also provides
important information that aids network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.
Note: If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet, then the menu settings page lists all the factory
default settings. Once you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings
as user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, choose another value,
and save it. To restore the factory default settings, see “Restoring the factory default settings” on page 239.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
Additional printer setup
52
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch Menu Settings Page.
The menu settings page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch Network Setup Page.
The network setup page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.
5 Check the first section on the network setup page, and confirm that Status is “Connected.”
If Status is “Not Connected,” the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult
a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Setting up the printer software
Installing printer software
A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer. The printer software is typically
installed during the initial printer setup. If you need to install the software after setup, follow these instructions:
For Windows users
1 Close all open software programs.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 From the main installation dialog, click Install Printer and Software.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Close all open software applications.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 From the Finder desktop, double-click the printer CD icon that automatically appears.
4 Double-click the Install Printer and Software icon.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen.
Additional printer setup
53
Using the World Wide Web
Updated printer software may be available on the Dell Support Web site at support.dell.com.
Updating available options in the printer driver
Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer
driver to make them available for print jobs.
For Windows users
1 Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
The printer folder opens.
4 Select the printer.
5 Right-click the printer, and then select Properties.
6 Click the Install Options tab.
7 Under Available Options, add any installed hardware options.
8 Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Select the printer, and then click Options & Supplies.
4 Click Driver, and then add any installed hardware options.
5 Click OK.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Select the printer, and then from the Printers menu, choose Show Info.
4 From the pop-up menu, choose Installable Options.
5 Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.
Additional printer setup
54
Setting up wireless printing
Follow these steps to set up your printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: See the enclosed Safety Sheet before making any cable or electrical
connection.
Note: Do not connect cables until instructed to do so.
1 Set up the printer hardware. For more information, see the Setup Guide.
2 Follow the instructions for your operating system:
• Windows—See “Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network” on page 55 and
“Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)” on page 56.
• Macintosh—See “Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network” on page 55 and
“Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)” on page 59.
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless
network
Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting. Check with your system support person if you are not
sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently
in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key.
or
– WPA or WPA2 passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be
set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
Additional printer setup
55
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the Advanced method, then you may need the following:
•
•
•
•
Authentication type
Inner authentication type
802.1X username and password
Certificates
Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:
• An optional wireless card is installed in your printer.
• Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer
on.
Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.
Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the screen.
2 From the printer control panel, select your language and country or region, and then touch Continue.
Additional printer setup
56
3 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
4 Deselect any function you plan to set up later, such as Fax or E-mail, and then touch Continue.
5 Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.
6 If Fax is enabled, then type in your Fax Station name and touch Enter. For more information on fax station name
and number, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect Fax.
7 If Fax is enabled, enter the Fax station (phone) number for this printer, and then touch Continue.
8 If E-mail is enabled, type in the Primary SMTP (mail server) Gateway address, and then touch Enter. For more
information on enabling e-mail, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect
E-mail.
9 If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.
10 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
11 Click Install Printer and Software.
12 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.
13 Select Suggested, and then click Next.
14 Click Wireless Network Attach.
Additional printer setup
57
15 Remove the label covering the USB port on the back of the printer.
16 Connect the cables in the following order:
a Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable
so you can print wirelessly.
b If you plan to set up fax now, then connect the fax cables. See the User's Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD for help on deciding how to connect the cables.
17 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the software installation.
Note: Basic is the recommended path to choose. Choose Advanced only if you want to customize your
installation or if your network uses 802.1x security.
18 To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer, follow steps 10 through 14 for each
computer.
Additional printer setup
58
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:
• An optional wireless card is installed in your printer.
• Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
Prepare to configure the printer
1 Locate the printer MAC address on the sheet that came with the printer. Write the last six digits of the MAC address
in the space provided:
MAC address: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
2 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer
on.
3 From the printer control panel, select your language and country or region, and then touch Continue.
4 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
5 Deselect any function you plan to set up later, such as Fax or E-mail, and then touch Continue.
Additional printer setup
59
6 Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.
7 If Fax is enabled, type in your Fax Station name, and then touch Enter. For more information on fax station name
and number, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect Fax.
8 If Fax is enabled, enter the Fax station (phone) number for this printer, and then touch Continue.
9 If E-mail is enabled, type in the Primary SMTP (mail server) Gateway address, and then touch Enter. For more
information on enabling e-mail, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect
E-mail.
10 If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.
Enter the printer information
1 Access the AirPort options.
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Network.
c Click AirPort.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.
b From the Applications folder, double-click Internet Connect.
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.
2 From the Network pop-up menu, select print server xxxxxx, where the x’s are the last six digits of the MAC
address located on the MAC address sheet.
3 Open the Safari browser.
4 From the Bookmarks drop-down menu, select Show.
5 Under Collections, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double-click the printer name.
Note: The application is referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.3, but is now called Bonjour by Apple
Computer.
6 From the main page of the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the page where the wireless settings information
is stored.
Additional printer setup
60
Configure the printer for wireless access
1 Type the name of your network (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router.
3 Select the type of security you use to protect your wireless network.
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network.
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on your computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Network.
c Click AirPort.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.
b From the Applications folder, double-click Internet Connect.
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.
7 From the Network pop-up menu, select your wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print to a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and
create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
1 Install a PPD file on the computer:
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
b Double-click the installer package for the printer.
c From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
d Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
e Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the
agreement.
f Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
g From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
h Type the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary software is installed on the computer.
i Click Restart when installation is complete.
2 Add the printer:
a For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
Additional printer setup
61
3 Click +.
4 Select the printer from the list.
5 Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.
2 Double-click the Utilities folder.
3 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
b For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Click AppleTalk.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.
2 Double-click the Utilities folder.
3 Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.
6 Click More Printers.
7 From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
8 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
9 Select the printer from the list.
10 Click Add.
Installing the printer on a wired network
Use the following instructions to install the printer on a wired network. These instructions apply to Ethernet
connection.
Before you install the printer on a wired network, make sure that:
• You have completed the initial setup of the printer.
• The printer is connected to your network with the appropriate type of cable.
For Windows users
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.
Additional printer setup
62
If the CD does not launch after a minute, then do the following:
a Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
2 Click Install Printer and Software.
3 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.
4 Select Suggested, and then click Next.
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, using IPv6, or to configure printers using scripts, select
Custom and follow the on-screen instructions.
5 Select Wired Network Attach, and then click Next.
6 Select the printer manufacturer from the list.
7 Select the printer model from the list, and then click Next.
8 Select the printer from the list of printers discovered on the network, and then click Finish.
Note: If your configured printer does not appear in the list of discovered printers, click Add Port and follow the
on-screen instructions.
9 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
For Macintosh users
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Print the network setup page from the printer. For information on printing a network setup page, see “Printing
a network setup page” on page 53.
3 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you
are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
4 Install the drivers and add the printer.
a Install a PPD file on the computer:
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
2 Double-click the installer package for the printer.
3 From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
4 Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
5 Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the
6
7
8
9
agreement.
Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary software is installed on the computer.
Click Restart when installation is complete.
b Add the printer:
• For IP printing:
Additional printer setup
63
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1
2
3
4
5
6
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
Click Print & Fax.
Click +.
Click IP.
Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
Double-click Utilities.
Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
From the Printer List, click Add.
Click IP.
Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
Click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
Click Print & Fax.
Click +.
Click AppleTalk.
Select the printer from the list.
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
Double-click Utilities.
Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
From the Printer List, click Add.
Choose the Default Browser tab.
Click More Printers.
From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
Select the printer from the list.
Click Add.
Note: If the printer doesn't appear in the list, you may need to add it using the IP address. Contact your
system support person for assistance.
Additional printer setup
64
Changing port settings after installing a new
network Internal Solutions Port
When a new network Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer is assigned a new IP address.
The printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address in order
to print to it over the network.
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address that will stay the same, then you do not need to make any changes to the
computer configurations.
• If the computers are configured to print to the printer by a network name that will stay the same, instead of by
IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the
wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection
remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. In the
event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection, disconnect
the wired connection, turn the printer off, and then turn the printer back on again. This will enable the wireless
ISP.
• Only one network connection at a time is active. If you want to switch the connection type between wired and
wireless, you must first turn the printer off, connect the cable (to switch to a wired connection) or disconnect
the cable (to switch to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on again.
For Windows users
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.
2 Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
3 In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
4 Press Enter, or click OK.
The printer folder opens.
5 Locate the printer that has changed.
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
6 Right-click the printer.
7 Click Properties.
8 Click the Ports tab.
9 Locate the port in the list, and then select it.
10 Click Configure Port.
11 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field. You can find the new IP address on the network
setup page you printed in step 1.
12 Click OK, and then click Close.
Additional printer setup
65
For Macintosh users
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.
2 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you
are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3 Add the printer:
• For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
a
b
c
d
e
f
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
Click Print & Fax.
Click +.
Click IP.
Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
From the Go menu, choose Applications.
Double-click Utilities.
Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
From the Printer List, click Add.
Click IP.
Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
Click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a
b
c
d
e
f
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
Click Print & Fax.
Click +.
Click AppleTalk.
Select the printer from the list.
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
From the Go menu, choose Applications.
Double-click Utilities.
Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
From the Printer List, click Add.
Choose the Default Browser tab.
Click More Printers.
From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
Additional printer setup
66
i Select the printer from the list.
j Click Add.
Setting up serial printing
In serial printing, data is transferred one bit at a time. Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing,
it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface
with a better transfer rate is not available.
After installing the serial port or communication (COM) port, you will need to configure the printer and the computer
so they can communicate. Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1 Set the parameters in the printer:
a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu with port settings.
b Locate the submenu with serial port settings.
c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings.
d Save the new settings.
e Print a menu settings page.
2 Install the printer driver:
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD. It launches automatically.
If the CD does not launch automatically, then do the following:
1 Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Click Install Printer and Software.
Click Agree to accept the Printer Software License Agreement.
Click Custom.
Make sure Select Components is selected, and then click Next.
Select the printer model from the menu, and then click Add Printer.
Click the + beside the printer model under Select Components.
Make sure the correct COM port is available under Select Components. This is the port where the serial cable
attaches to the computer (example: COM1).
i Make sure the box next to the selected printer model is checked.
j Select any other optional software you want to install, and then click Next.
k Click Finish to complete the printer software installation.
3 Set the COM port parameters:
After the printer driver is installed, you must set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer
driver.
The serial parameters in the COM port must match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
a Open the Device Manager.
1 Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type devmgmt.msc.
Additional printer setup
67
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
The Device Manager opens.
b
c
d
e
Click + to expand the list of available ports.
Select the communications port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
Click Properties.
On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer.
Look for the printer settings under the serial heading on the Menu Settings page you printed earlier.
f Click OK, and then close all the windows.
g Print a test page to verify printer installation. When a test page prints successfully, printer setup is complete.
Additional printer setup
68
Minimizing your printer's environmental
impact
Saving paper and toner
Using recycled paper and other office papers
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher
papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in
laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause
paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing
conditions).
Conserving supplies
There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing, copying, or
receiving faxes. You can:
Use both sides of the paper
You can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper for a printed document, a copy, or an incoming
fax. For more information, see:
• “Printing on both sides of the paper (duplexing)” on page 95
• “Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)” on page 107
• “Printing an incoming fax on both sides of the paper (duplexing)” on page 142
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper from
the Print dialog.
To copy two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper, see
“Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet” on page 110.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
69
Choose scanning
You can avoid making a paper output of a document or photograph by scanning it and then saving it to a computer
program, application, or flash drive. For more information, see:
• “Sending an e-mail using the touch screen” on page 119
• “Scanning to a computer” on page 152
• “Scanning to a flash drive” on page 153
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 76.
Saving energy
Using Eco-Mode
Use Eco-Mode to quickly select one or more ways to reduce your printer's environmental impact.
Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select an Eco-Mode setting.
Choose
To
Energy
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.
• The printer enters Power Saver mode after one minute of inactivity.
• When the printer enters Power Saver mode, the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin
lights are turned off.
• The scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started.
Paper
• Enable the automatic duplex feature
• Turn off print log features.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.
Off
Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco-Mode. This setting supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
To select an Eco-Mode setting:
1 On the home screen, touch
.
2 Touch Settings.
3 Touch General Settings.
4 Touch Eco-Mode.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
70
5 Touch the arrows to select a setting.
6 Touch Submit.
Submitting changes appears.
Adjusting Power Saver
To save energy, you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Power Saver mode.
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings, and then click General Settings.
3 Click Timeouts.
4 In the Power Saver box, type in the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Power Saver
mode.
5 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears.
6 Touch Timeouts.
7 Touch the arrows next to Power Saver Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait
before it enters Power Saver mode.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch
.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
71
Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you are having trouble reading your display, you can adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100 . The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings, and then click General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness box, type in the brightness percentage you want for your home screen.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Screen Brightness appears.
6 Touch the arrows to select a setting.
7 Touch Submit.
8 Touch
.
Setting the standard exit bin light
To save energy, you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin.
Available settings are Off, Dim, and Bright.
The factory default setting for Normal/Standby Mode is Bright.
The factory default setting for Power Saver is Dim.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings, and then click General Settings.
3 Click Output Lighting.
4 From the Normal/Standby Mode list, select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in Ready or Standby
mode.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
72
5 From the Power Saver list, select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in Power Saver mode.
Note: For more information on Power Saver mode, see “Adjusting Power Saver” on page 71.
6 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings, and then touch General Settings.
4 Touch the down arrow until Output Lighting appears.
5 Touch Output Lighting.
6 Touch the arrow button next to Normal/Standby Mode to select the light settings the standard exit bin will
use when in Ready or Standby mode.
7 Touch the arrow button next to Power Saver to select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in
Power Saver mode.
Note: For more information on Power Saver mode, see “Adjusting Power Saver” on page 71.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch
.
Reducing printer noise
Use Quiet Mode to reduce the printer noise.
Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select a Quiet Mode setting.
Choose
To
On
Reduce printer noise.
• You may notice a reduction in processing speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to
print. You may notice a short delay before the first page
is printed.
• Fans run at a reduced speed or are turned off.
Off
Use factory default settings. This setting supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
To select a Quiet Mode setting:
1 On the home screen, touch
.
2 Touch Settings.
3 Touch General Settings.
4 Touch Quiet Mode.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
73
5 Touch the arrows to select a setting.
6 Touch Submit.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
74
Loading paper and specialty media
This section explains how to load the trays and feeders. It also includes information about paper orientation, setting
the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type
The Paper Size setting for the standard 250 tray and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper
size menu. The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all
trays that do not contain plain paper.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Paper Menu.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.
5 Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears.
6 Touch Submit.
7 Touch
to return to the home screen.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:
• Units of measure (millimeters or inches)
• Portrait Width
• Portrait Height
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
Specify a unit of measurement
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Paper Menu.
4 Touch the down arrow until Universal Setup appears, and then touch Universal Setup.
5 Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired unit of measure.
6 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
7 Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired width or height.
Loading paper and specialty media
75
8 Touch Submit to save your selection.
Submitting Selection appears, followed by the Paper menu.
9 Touch
to return to the home screen.
Avoiding jams
The following hints can help you avoid jams:
Paper tray recommendations
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure the paper lies flat in the paper tray.
Do not remove the paper tray while the printer is printing.
Do not load the paper tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
Make sure the guides in the paper tray or the manual feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too
tightly against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the paper tray in firmly after loading paper.
Paper recommendations
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
•
•
•
•
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
Store paper per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Loading trays
1 Pull the tray completely out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media
76
2 Squeeze and slide the guides to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
For long paper like A4 or legal, squeeze and slide the length guide backwards to accommodate the length of
paper you are loading.
Loading paper and specialty media
77
If you are loading A6-size paper:
a Squeeze and slide the length guide toward the center of the tray to the A5 size position.
b Raise the A6 backstop.
Notes:
• The standard tray accommodates only 150 sheets of A6-size paper. Notice the maximum fill line on the A6
backstop which indicates the maximum height for loading A6-size paper. Do not try to overload the tray.
• A6-size paper cannot be loaded in the optional tray.
Note: Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.
3 Flex a stack of paper back and forth to loosen the sheets, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4 Load the paper stack toward the back of the tray as shown with the recommended print side facedown.
Note: The maximum fill line on the width guide indicates the maximum height for loading paper. Do not load
A6-size paper to the maximum fill line; the tray holds only 150 sheets of A6-size paper.
Loading paper and specialty media
78
1
Maximum fill line
Load letterhead with the top edge of the sheet toward the front of the tray and the design facedown.
5 Squeeze and slide the guides to lightly touch the side of the stack.
Loading paper and specialty media
79
6 Insert the tray.
7 If the paper type you loaded differs from the type that was previously loaded in the tray, then change the Paper
Size/Type setting on the Paper menu.
Using the multipurpose feeder
Opening the multipurpose feeder
1 Grasp the handle, and pull the multipurpose feeder door down.
Loading paper and specialty media
80
2 Grasp the raised handle, and pull the extension forward.
3 Grasp the handle, and pull the extension so it flips forward.
4 Guide the extension down gently so the multipurpose feeder is extended fully and open.
Loading paper and specialty media
81
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Squeeze the tab located on the right width guide, and move the guides out fully.
2 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
• Flex sheets of paper or paper labels back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease
the paper or labels. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
• Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the print side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
Loading paper and specialty media
82
• Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
Note: Fanning prevents the edges of envelopes from sticking together. It also helps them feed properly to
avoid jams. Do not fold or crease envelopes.
3 Load the paper or specialty media.
Notes:
• Do not force any paper into the multipurpose feeder. Overfilling may cause jams.
• Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or specialty media under the stack height limiters
which are located on the guides.
• Load paper, transparencies, and card stock with the recommended print side faceup and the top edge entering
the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging the transparencies came
in.
Loading paper and specialty media
83
• Load letterhead with the logo faceup and the top edge entering the printer first.
• Load envelopes with the flap side down and the stamp location in the position shown. The stamp and address
are shown to illustrate the proper orientation for loading envelopes.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings,
or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
4 Squeeze the tab located on the right width guide to adjust the guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
Loading paper and specialty media
84
5 Slide the paper gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop. Paper should lie flat in the
multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder and is not bent or wrinkled.
6 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking trays
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next
linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.
The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray
except the multipurpose feeder. The printer can sense A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, Executive, and Universal paper
sizes. The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu
available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: To link the multipurpose feeder, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu item.
The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Unlinking trays
Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray.
To unlink a tray, change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray:
• Paper Type (for example: Plain Paper, Letterhead, Custom Type <x>)
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked
trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type <x>, or define your own custom name.
• Paper Size (for example: letter, A4, statement)
Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray automatically. Paper Size settings for the
multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper
loaded in the tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Paper may not be
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.
Loading paper and specialty media
85
Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Paper Menu.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.
5 Select the tray number or MP Feeder Type.
6 Touch the left or right arrow until Custom Type <x> or another custom name appears.
7 Touch Submit.
Changing a Custom Type <x> name
If the printer is on a network, you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type <x>
for each of the custom paper types that are loaded. When a Custom Type <x> name is changed, the menus display
the new name instead of Custom Type <x>.
To change a Custom Type <x> name:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the address in the
TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Paper Menu.
4 Click Custom Name.
5 Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name <x> box.
Note: This custom name will replace a custom type <x> name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type
menus.
6 Click Submit.
7 Click Custom Types.
Custom Types appears, followed by your custom name.
8 Select a Paper Type setting from the pick list next to your custom name.
9 Click Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media
86
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier
paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur
after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in
hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause
feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper
is too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield
points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For paper heavier than 176 g/m2, grain
short is recommended.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
87
Fiber content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper
containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
For detailed information on paper with recycled fiber content, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on
page 69.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm
(±0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
•
•
•
•
•
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
Multiple-part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
88
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected
by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting
or releasing hazardous emissions.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label
manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60%.
• Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Paper size
Dimensions
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5
Optional 550- Multi- purpose
sheet tray
feeder
Duplex
unit
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
X
X
A61
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
X
X
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
X
X
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
X
X
1
Standard
250- sheet
tray
Automatic
Document
feeder
X
A6 is supported only for grain long papers.
2
If a paper size you want to use is not listed, configure a Universal paper size. For more information, see “Configuring
Universal paper settings” on page 75.
3 To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 210 mm (8.267 in) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in); Universal length
must be between 279.4 mm (11 in) and 355.6 mm (14 in).
Paper and specialty media guidelines
89
Paper size
Dimensions
Standard
250- sheet
tray
Optional 550- Multi- purpose
sheet tray
feeder
Duplex
unit
Oficio
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
X
Folio
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
X
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
Universal2, 3
138 x 210 mm
(5.5 x 8.3 in.) up
to 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
X
X
70 x 127 mm
X
(2.8 x 5 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
X
X
148 x 182 mm
(5.8 x 7.7 in.) up
to 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
X
Automatic
Document
feeder
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
X
X
X
X
9 Envelope
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X
X
X
X
10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
X
X
X
X
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
X
X
X
X
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9.1 in.)
X
X
X
X
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X
X
X
X
Other Envelope
98 x 162 mm
X
(3.99 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X
X
X
1
A6 is supported only for grain long papers.
2
If a paper size you want to use is not listed, configure a Universal paper size. For more information, see “Configuring
Universal paper settings” on page 75.
3 To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 210 mm (8.267 in) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in); Universal length
must be between 279.4 mm (11 in) and 355.6 mm (14 in).
Paper and specialty media guidelines
90
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine and the duplex path support 60–90 g/m2 (16–24 lb) paper weights. The multipurpose feeder
supports 60–163 g/m2 (16–43 lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type
Standard 250-sheet
tray
Optional 550-sheet
tray
X
X
Multi-purpose
feeder
Duplex unit
Plain Paper
Card stock
X
Transparencies
X
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
X
X
X
Envelopes
X
X
Letterhead
X
X
X
X
Bond
Letterhead
X
Preprinted
Colored paper
Light paper
Heavy paper
Rough/Cotton
X
Custom Type <x>
(where x represents 1–
6)
Paper capacities
The capacities of the trays and the multipurpose feeder are based on 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.
Load up to
Notes
Tray 1
250 sheets of paper
150 sheets of A6-size paper
50 paper labels
50 transparencies
Note: Vinyl, pharmacy, or dual-sided labels are not supported. Use
paper labels only. Single-sided paper labels designed for laser
printers are supported for occasional use. It is recommended to
print no more than 20 pages of paper labels per month.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
91
Load up to
Notes
Tray 2
550 sheets of paper
50 paper labels
Note: Only one optional drawer may be installed on the printer at
a time. The maximum amount of paper that can be loaded
depends on whether you have an optional 550-sheet tray.
Multipurpose feeder
50 sheets of paper
15 paper labels
10 transparencies
10 sheets of card stock
7 envelopes
Note: Feed paper into the multipurpose feeder only to the point
where its leading edge can contact the paper guides. Do not force
the paper into the feeder.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
92
Software overview
Use the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer to install a combination of software applications,
depending on your operating system.
Note: If you purchased your printer and computer separately, you must use the Software and Documentation CD to
install these software applications.
Note: These software applications are not available with Macintosh®.
Status Monitor Center
Note: For the local Status Monitor Center to work properly, bidirectional communication support must be in place
so the printer and computer can communicate. The Status Monitor Center works when the printer is connected to
a network or to a computer locally through a USB cable.
Use the Status Monitor Center to manage multiple Status Monitors.
• Double-click a printer name to open its Status Monitor, or select Run to open a Status Monitor for a particular
printer.
• Select Update to change the appearance of the list of printers.
Driver Profiler
Use the Driver Profiler to create driver profiles that contain custom driver settings. A driver profile can contain a group
of saved printer driver settings and other data for such things as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Print orientation and N-Up (document settings)
Installation status of an output tray (printer options)
User-defined paper sizes (custom papers)
Simple text and watermarks
Overlay references
Font references
Form associations
Dell Printer Alert Utility
Note: This application is not available with Windows 2000 or earlier.
The Dell Printer Alert Utility informs you when there are errors requiring your intervention on your printer. When
there is an error, a bubble appears telling you what the error is, and points you to the appropriate recovery information.
Note: For the Dell Printer Alert Utility to work properly, bidirectional communication support must be in place so the
printer and computer can communicate. An exception is added to the Windows Firewall to allow this communication.
If you opted to install the Dell Printer Alert Utility with your printer software, the utility automatically launches when
the software installation is completed. The utility is active if you see in the System Tray.
Software overview
93
To disable the Dell Printer Alert Utility:
1 From the System Tray, right click the
icon.
2 Select Exit.
To re-enable the Dell Printer Alert Utility:
1 In Windows Vista or later:
a Click ª Programs.
b Click Dell Printers.
c Click Dell 3333dn and 3335dn Laser MFP.
In Windows XP:
Click Startª Programs or All Programsª Dell Printersª Dell 3333dn and 3335dn Laser MFP.
2 Click Printer Alert Utility.
Software overview
94
Printing
Printing a document
1 Load paper into a tray or feeder.
2 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
3 Do one of the following:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File ª Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup, and then adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific size or type of paper, adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded
paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.
c Click OK, and then click Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop-up menus, adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Printing on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
In order to save paper, you can print a multiple-page document on both sides of the paper.
1 On the home screen, touch Menus, and then touch Settings.
2 Touch the down arrows until Print Settings appears.
3 Touch Print Settings.
4 Touch Finishing Menu.
5 Touch the Sides (Duplex) arrows until 2 sided appears.
Printing
95
6 Touch Submit.
Submitting changes appears.
7 Touch
to return to the home screen.
Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
•
•
•
•
Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Before loading letterhead, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:
– “Loading trays” on page 76
– “Using the multipurpose feeder” on page 80
Tips on using transparencies
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on transparencies:
• Feed transparencies from a 250-sheet tray, a 550-sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting,
or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Use transparencies that are 138–146 g/m2 (37–39 lb. bond) in weight.
• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
• Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on envelopes:
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: Envelopes can be printed at a temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Envelope Weight is set to Heavy and
Envelope Texture is set to Rough. Select these settings using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer
control panel Paper menu.
• For the best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond)
weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed
90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes.
Printing
96
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
Note: This printer is intended for occasional paper label printing only.
• Do not load labels together with paper or transparencies in the same source; mixing media can cause feeding
problems.
• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Labels.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge,
and use a non-oozing adhesive.
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single-ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
When printing on card stock:
• Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.
Printing
97
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.
• Use grain short card stock when possible.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Holding jobs in the printer
When sending a job to the printer, you can specify that you want the printer to hold the job in memory until you
start the job from the printer control panel. All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called
held jobs.
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Job type
Description
Confidential
When you send a Confidential print job to the printer, you must create a PIN from
the computer. The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0–9. The job is held
in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel and
choose to print or delete the job.
Verify
When you send a Verify print job, the printer prints one copy and holds the
remaining copies in printer memory. Verify lets you examine the first copy to see
if it is satisfactory before printing the remaining copies. Once all copies are
printed, the job is automatically deleted from printer memory.
Reserve
When you send a Reserve print job, the printer does not print the job immediately.
It stores the job in memory so you can print the job later. The job is held in memory
until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu.
Repeat
When you send a Repeat print job, the printer prints all requested copies of the
job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later. You
can print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory.
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve
jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
1 With a document open, click File ª Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Other Options, and then click Print and Hold.
4 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job,
also enter a four-digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.
6 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.
Printing
98
7 Touch your user name.
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down
arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.
8 Touch Confidential Jobs.
9 Enter your PIN.
10 Touch Done.
11 Touch the job you want to print.
12 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh
computer
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve
jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job,
also enter a four-digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.
5 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.
6 Touch your user name.
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down
arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.
7 Touch Confidential Jobs.
8 Enter your PIN.
9 Touch the job you want to print.
10 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.
Printing
99
Printing from a flash drive
A USB port is located on the printer control panel. Insert a flash drive to print supported file types. Supported file
types include: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, and .dcx.
Notes:
• Hi-Speed flash drives must support the Full-speed standard. Flash drives supporting only USB Low-speed
capabilities are not supported.
• USB devices must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS (New Technology
File System) or any other file system are not supported.
• If selecting an encrypted .pdf file, then enter the file password from the printer control panel.
• Before printing an encrypted .pdf file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
To print from a flash drive:
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs, then Printer Busy appears. After the
other jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
3 Touch the document you want to print.
Note: Folders found on the flash drive appear as folders. File names are appended by the extension type (for
example, .jpg).
Printing
100
4 Touch the right arrow if you want to increase the number of printed copies.
5 Touch Print.
Note: Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print .pdf files
from the flash drive as held jobs.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
To print samples of the fonts currently available for your printer:
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch Menus.
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch the up or down arrow until Print Fonts appears, and then touch Print Fonts.
5 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Directory appears.
5 Touch Print Directory.
Printing the print quality test pages
Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Hold down
and
while turning the printer on.
3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears.
5 Touch Print Quality Pages Menu.
6 Touch Print Quality Pages.
Printing
101
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press
on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Canceling a print job from the computer
To cancel a print job, do one of the following:
For Windows users
1 Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
The printer folder opens.
4 Double-click the printer icon.
5 Select the job to cancel.
6 From the keyboard, press Delete.
From the Windows taskbar:
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.
1 Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Select a job to cancel.
3 From the keyboard, press Delete.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later:
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax, and then double-click the printer icon.
3 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
4 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier:
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Double-click the printer icon.
Printing
102
4 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
5 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
Printing
103
Copying
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press
.
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
The copy screen appears.
4 Change the copy settings as needed.
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying
104
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
The copy screen appears.
3 Change the copy settings as needed.
4 Touch Copy It.
5 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
Next Page.
6 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 On the home screen, touch Copy.
3 Touch Options.
4 Touch Content.
5 Touch Photograph.
6 Touch Done.
7 Touch Copy It.
8 Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Making transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder and then place
transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.
6 Touch the desired size of the transparencies, and then touch Continue.
7 Touch the up or down arrow until Transparency appears.
Copying
105
8 Touch Transparency, and then touch Continue.
9 Touch Copy It.
Copying to letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder and place letterhead facedown, top edge first in the multipurpose
feeder.
6 Touch the desired size of the letterhead, and then touch Continue.
7 Touch the up or down arrow until Letterhead appears.
8 Touch Letterhead, and then touch Continue.
9 Touch Copy It.
Customizing copy settings
Copying from one size to another
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then select the size you want the copy to be.
Note: If you select a paper size that is different from the “Copy from” size, then the printer will scale the size
automatically.
6 Touch Copy It.
Copying
106
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
During the copy process, you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice. For example, if specialty
media is located in the multipurpose feeder, and you want to make copies on that media:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder or the tray that contains the paper type you want.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will need to also select the paper size and type.
6 Touch Copy It.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy.
For example, select 1-sided to 2-sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2-sided copies.
Note: The ADF automatically scans both sides of the page.
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded
and the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled
to fit a single paper size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying to mixed paper sizes
The printer has two paper trays, one tray loaded with letter-size paper and the other with legal-size paper. A document
that contains letter- and legal-size pages needs to be copied.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying
107
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Auto Size Sense.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Auto Size Match.
6 Touch Copy It.
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding
to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying to a single paper size
The printer has one paper tray, loaded with letter-size paper. A document that contains letter- and legal-size pages
needs to be copied.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Mixed Letter/Legal.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Letter.
6 Touch Copy It.
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan and then scales the legal-size pages to print on letter-size
paper.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying
108
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Under Content, touch the left or right arrow to select what you are copying:
• Text—Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Used when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser
printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images
5 Touch Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated
Not collated
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off.
To turn collate off:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
5 Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated.
6 Touch Copy It.
Copying
109
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Separator Sheets.
Note: Collate must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is Off, the separator
sheets are added to the end of the print job.
6 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B5 JIS.
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Select a duplex setting.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Paper Saver.
7 Select the desired output.
8 Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies.
9 Touch Done.
10 Touch Copy It.
Copying
110
Creating a custom job (job build)
The custom job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with
the same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, a set consists of one page.
For example:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Custom Job.
6 Touch On.
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
9 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.
10 If you have another document to scan, load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown
on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed. Otherwise,
touch Finish the job.
Pausing the current print job to make copies
When the “Allow priority copies” setting is On, the printer pauses the current print job when you start a copy job.
Note: The “Allow priority copies” setting must be set to On in the Copy Settings menu so that you can pause the
current print job and make copies.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying
111
3 From the printer control panel, press
.
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Header/Footer.
6 Pick an area of the page to place the date and time.
7 Touch Date/Time, and then touch Continue.
8 Touch Done.
9 Touch Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, or Draft. To
place a message on the copies:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Overlay.
6 Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use.
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
Copying
112
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel
Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed
1 Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen, or press
on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The remainder of the copy job is canceled. The home screen appears.
Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy. Touch a paper size
button to select it as the “Copy from” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy to” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting
displayed.
• If the size settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
• If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, touch Manual Feeder,
and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper.
Copying
113
Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale
can also be set for you automatically.
• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, setting the
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document
information on your copy.
• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
• Hold your finger on the right arrow to make a continuous increment change.
• Hold your finger on the left or right arrow two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document.
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser
printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images
Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex)
of two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided
copies (simplex) from two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).
Options
Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver, Create Booklet, Advanced Imaging,
Custom Job, Separator Sheets, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Header/Footer, Overlay, Advanced Duplex, and Save as
Shortcut settings.
Copying
114
Paper Saver
This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is also
called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a
single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders adds
or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.
Create Booklet
This option creates a stack of collated pages that, when folded, forms a booklet half the page size of the original
document and with all the pages in order.
Note: To use Create Booklet, you must have a duplex unit attached to the printer.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Shadow
Detail, Scan Edge to Edge, and sharpness before you copy the document.
Custom Job
This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Separator Sheets
This option places a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, and print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn
from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
Margin Shift
This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance. This can be useful in providing space to bind or holepunch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want. If the additional margin
is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
Edge Erase
This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document. You can choose to eliminate an
equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the
selected area, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.
Header/Footer
This option turns on the Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text and prints them in the specified
header or footer location.
Overlay
This option creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose between Urgent,
Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word you pick
will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a
button with an icon of that overlay will be available.
Copying
115
Advanced Duplex
This option controls whether the documents are one-sided or two-sided, what orientation your original documents
have, and how your documents are bound.
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.
Save as Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut.
Improving copy quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
• Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy, and
preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and
documents that contain only text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a
mixture of text and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business
graphics, and brochures.
When should I use Printed Image mode? Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone photographs, graphics such
as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or
newspaper
When should I use Photograph mode?
Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high-quality
photograph or inkjet print.
Copying
116
E-mailing
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an
e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Getting ready to e-mail
Enabling the e-mail function
The e-mail function must be enabled prior to use. If you disabled the e-mail function when setting up the printer for
the first time, or if the printer has been off for an extended time, then follow these steps:
Note: To complete this step, you must know your Primary SMTP (mail server) Gateway address. For more information,
see your system support person.
1 Touch Menus.
2 Touch Settings.
3 Touch General Settings.
4 Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setup to select Yes.
5 Touch Submit.
Submitting changes appears.
6 Turn off the printer, wait ten seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
7 From the printer control panel, select your language.
8 Select your country or region, and then touch Continue.
9 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
10 Touch E-mail, and then touch Continue.
11 Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.
12 Touch Enter.
E-mailing
117
13 Touch Continue.
14 Type in the Primary SMTP Gateway address, and then touch Enter.
15 If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.
When the home screen appears, the e-mail function is enabled.
Setting up the e-mail function
For e-mail to operate, it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address.
To set up the e-mail function:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings.
5 Click Setup E-mail Server.
6 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
7 Click Add.
Configuring the e-mail settings
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings.
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6 Click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
E-mailing
118
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
4 Click E-mail Shortcut Setup.
5 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
6 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
7 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
1 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
2 Type the recipient's e-mail address.
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.
4 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Enter.
5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Enter the e-mail address or shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
5 Touch E-mail It.
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
E-mailing
119
3 Press
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
4 Touch E-mail It.
Sending an e-mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Touch Search Address Book.
5 Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To box.
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add; or search the address book.
7 Touch E-mail It.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e-mail address.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Subject.
7 Type the e-mail subject.
8 Touch Done.
9 Touch Message.
10 Type an e-mail message.
11 Touch Done.
12 Touch E-mail It.
E-mailing
120
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e-mail address.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free
by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent
JPEG.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
7 Touch E-mail It.
Note: If you selected Encrypted PDF, then enter your password twice.
E-mailing color documents
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e-mail address.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Color.
7 Touch E-mail It.
Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
E-mailing
121
Understanding e-mail options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e-mail screen appears with your new
setting displayed.
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed letter and legal
paper sizes.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Binding
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
E-mail Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail. You can enter up to 255 characters.
E-mail File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
E-mail Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.
E-mailing
122
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and
the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your e-mail.
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This
increases the amount of information saved.
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the e-mail. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e-mail
address.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror
Image before you copy the document
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned e-mails will turn out
E-mailing
123
Faxing
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Getting the printer ready to fax
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business,
other entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine,
business, other entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start-up
screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:
Station Name
Station Number
1 When Station Name appears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
2 After entering the Station Name, touch Submit.
Faxing
124
3 When Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number.
4 After entering the Station Number, touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.
7 Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem. To
determine the best way to set up the printer, see the following table.
Notes:
• The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet. Other devices (such
as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in
the setup steps.
• If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is required.
Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that
can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.
• You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line
to send and receive faxes.
Equipment and service options
Fax connection setup
Connect directly to the telephone line
See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on
page 126
Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service
See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 126.
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 127.
Services Digital Network (ISDN) system
Use a Distinctive Ring service
See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 127.
Connect to a telephone line, telephone, and answering
machine
See “Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering
machine to the same telephone line” on page 128
Connect through an adapter used in your area
See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region”
on page 130.
Connect to a computer with a modem
See “Connecting to a computer with a modem” on
page 134.
Faxing
125
Connecting to an analog telephone line
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US-style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the
equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
Connecting to a DSL service
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.
3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.
Faxing
126
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.
Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.
When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.
When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.
For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX
system.
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have
multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern.
This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, follow
these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want the printer to answer:
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
a
b
c
d
e
On the home screen, touch
.
Touch Settings.
Touch Fax Settings.
Touch Analog Fax Settings.
Touch the down arrow until Distinctive Ring Settings appears
Faxing
127
f Touch Distinctive Ring Settings.
g Touch the arrow for the pattern setting you want to change.
h Touch Submit.
Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine to
the same telephone line
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack .
3 Remove the plug from the printer EXT port
.
4 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the printer EXT port
Faxing
128
.
Use one of the following methods:
Answering machine
Answering machine and telephone
Faxing
129
Telephone or a telephone with an integrated answering
machine
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active
telephone wall jack:
Country/region
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Austria
Cyprus
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Ireland
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
New Zealand
Netherlands
Norway
Portugal
Sweden
Switzerland
United Kingdom
Italy
Countries or regions except Austria, Germany, and Switzerland
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an
answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
Note: There is a special RJ-11 plug installed in the printer EXT port . Do not remove this plug. It is necessary
for the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone
wall jack.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your location.
Faxing
130
3 Connect the answering machine or telephone to the adapter.
Use one of the following methods:
Answering machine
Telephone
Faxing
131
Austria, Germany, and Switzerland
There is a special RJ-11 plug installed in the printer EXT port
operation of the fax function and connected telephones.
. Do not remove this plug. It is necessary for the proper
Connecting to a telephone wall jack in Germany
Note: There is a special RJ-11 plug installed in the printer EXT port
proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones.
. Do not remove this plug. It is necessary for the
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your location.
Faxing
132
3 Connect the adapter into the N slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.
4 If you would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication, then connect a second telephone
line (not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.
5 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, then connect a second
telephone cable (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the active analog
telephone wall jack.
Faxing
133
Connecting to a computer with a modem
Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Remove the protective plug from the printer EXT port
.
4 Connect your telephone to the computer telephone jack.
Faxing
134
5 Connect an additional telephone cord (not provided) from the computer modem to the printer EXT port
.
Enabling the fax function
The fax function must be enabled prior to use. If you disabled the fax function when setting up the printer for the
first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, then follow these steps:
Note: Before completing these instructions, make sure the fax cables are connected. For more information, see
“Choosing a fax connection” on page 125.
1 Touch Menus.
2 Touch Settings.
3 Touch General Settings.
4 Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setup to select Yes.
5 Touch Submit.
Submitting changes appears.
6 Turn off the printer, connect the fax cables, and then turn the printer back on.
7 From the printer control panel, select your language.
8 Select your country or region, and then touch Continue.
9 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
10 Touch Fax, and then touch Continue.
11 Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.
12 Enter the Fax Station Name, and then touch Enter.
13 Enter the Fax Station Number, and then touch Continue.
14 Touch Enter.
15 If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.
When the home screen appears, the fax function is enabled.
Faxing
135
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.
7 Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, you may have
to reset the date and time.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Security.
4 Click Set Date and Time.
5 Click inside the Set Date & Time box, and then enter the current date and time.
6 Click Submit.
Turning daylight saving time on or off
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time for certain time zones:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Security.
4 Click Set Date and Time.
5 Select Automatically Observe DST.
6 Click Submit.
Faxing
136
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press . The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to” box.
Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
5 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk. This gives you the flexibility
of faxing documents directly from software programs.
For Windows users
Notes:
• In order to perform this function from your computer, you must use the PostScript printer driver for your printer.
• Verify that the fax option is installed in the printer driver.
1 With a file open, click File ª Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click the Other Options tab, and then click Fax.
4 On the Fax screen, type the name and number of the fax recipient.
5 Click OK, and then click OK again.
6 Click OK.
For Mac OS X version 10.2 and 10.3 users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 From the print options pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select Fax, and then enter the recipient name, number, and other information as needed.
4 Click Print.
Faxing
137
For Mac OS X version 10.4 or later users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 From the PDF pop-up menu, choose Fax PDF.
3 Type the fax number in the To field, and enter other information as needed.
4 Click Fax.
If you receive an error, "No fax modems were found", follow these directions to add your printer as a fax:
a
b
c
d
From the Printer pop-up menu, choose Add Printer.
Select the printer from the dialog that appears.
From the Print Using pop-up menu, choose Select a driver to use.
From the list, choose your printer fax model, and then click Add.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web
Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to
send a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to
a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup.
5 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
6 Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7 Click Add.
Faxing
138
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number.
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
5 Touch Save as Shortcut.
6 Enter a name for the shortcut.
7 Touch OK.
8 Touch Fax It to send the fax, or touch
to return to the home screen.
Changing the fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web
Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup.
5 Select the list entry, and then update it using the text box.
6 Click Modify.
Faxing
139
Using shortcuts and the address book
Using fax shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut numbers
when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the
Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number (1–99999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number, you can
quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
Using the address book
Note: The address book feature is enabled if it contains at least one entry.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Touch Search Address Book.
5 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.
6 Touch Search.
7 Touch the name to add it to the “Fax to” list.
8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses.
9 Touch Fax It.
Faxing
140
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax. Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra
Fine (slowest speed, best quality).
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.
5 Touch Options.
6 From the Resolution area, touch the left or right arrow to adjust the resolution to your preference.
7 Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.
5 Touch Options.
6 From the Darkness area, touch the left or right arrow to adjust the darkness of the fax.
7 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Advanced Options.
Faxing
141
7 Touch Delayed Send.
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission
are listed in the Fax Queue.
8 Touch the left or right arrow to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is
unavailable.
9 Touch Done.
10 Touch Fax it.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Printing an incoming fax on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
In order to save paper, you can print all incoming faxes on both sides of the paper.
1 On the home screen, touch Menus.
2 Touch Settings, and then touch Fax Settings.
3 Touch Analog Fax Setup.
4 Touch Fax Receive Setting.
5 Touch the down arrow until Sides (Duplex) appears.
6 Touch the up or down arrow until Yes appears.
7 Touch Submit.
Viewing a fax log
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
Faxing
142
5 Click the Block No Name Fax option.
This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
6 In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to
block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to
memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Understanding fax options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The fax screen appears with your new
setting displayed.
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper
sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Faxing
143
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photograph. Color can be
turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your scan.
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This
increases the amount of information saved.
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the fax. Color documents can be scanned and sent to a fax destination.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.
•
•
•
•
Standard—Suitable for most documents
Fine—Recommended for documents with small print
Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
Ultra fine—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Delayed Send, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job,
Transmission Log, Scan Preview, Edge Erase, and Advanced Duplex settings.
• Delayed Send—Lets you send a fax at a later time or date. After setting up your fax, touch Delayed Send, enter
the time and date you would like to send your fax, and then touch Done. This setting can be especially useful in
sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times
are cheaper.
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, the fax is sent the next time the
printer is turned on.
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image,
Shadow Details, Scan Edge to Edge and Sharpness before you fax the document
• Custom Job—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
Faxing
144
• Scan Preview—Displays the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning
is paused, and a preview image appears.
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Improving fax quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax, and
preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts, carbon copy forms, and
documents that contain only text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a
mixture of text and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics,
and brochures.
When should I use Photo mode?
Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a
magazine or newspaper.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually
or at a scheduled day or time.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click Holding Faxes.
6 Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box.
Note: This may not be applicable in some cases.
7 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
Faxing
145
8 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps. Otherwise, click Submit.
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
e Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 From the Fax Forwarding menu under Fax Receive settings, select one of the following:
• Print
• Print and Forward
• Forward
6 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box, and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the “Forward
to” menu.
8 Click Submit.
Faxing
146
Scanning to an FTP address
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
sent to the server at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer. Sending
a document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over
your network instead of over the phone line.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.
4 Type the FTP address.
5 Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Scanning to an FTP address
147
3 Press #, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.
4 Touch Search Address Book.
5 Type the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To: field.
7 Touch Send It.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of typing the entire FTP site address using the keypad each time you want to send a document to an FTP
server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating
shortcut numbers: using a computer or using the printer touch screen.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5 Enter the appropriate information into the boxes.
6 Enter a shortcut number.
7 Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1 On the home screen, touch FTP.
2 Type the address of the FTP site.
Scanning to an FTP address
148
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.
4 Enter a name for the shortcut.
5 Touch Enter.
6 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect,
then touch Cancel, and reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7 Touch Send It to start the scan, or touch
to return to the home screen.
Understanding FTP options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with your new
setting displayed.
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper
sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Binding
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Scanning to an FTP address
149
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG, or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and
the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file.
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This
increases the amount of information saved.
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP site,
computer, e-mail address, or the printer.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, and Mirror Image before you scan
the document
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out
Scanning to an FTP address
150
Improving FTP quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of sending a document
to an FTP site, and preserving images copied from the original document is
not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents
that only contain text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that contains
a mixture of text and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics,
and brochures.
When should I use Photo mode?
Use Photo mode when the original document is composed mostly of photos
printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.
Scanning to an FTP address
151
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be
directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the
computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the
printer.
Scanning to a computer
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Scan Profile.
3 Click Create Scan Profile.
Note: Your computer must have java program installed to be able to create a scan profile.
4 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
5 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
6 Enter a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
7 Click Submit.
8 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.
9 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
10 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
152
11 Press
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and
then touch Profiles.
12 After you enter the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you
specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.
13 Touch Finish the Job.
14 Return to the computer to view the file.
The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
4 Touch Scan to USB drive.
5 Select the size and file that you want to scan.
6 Touch Scan It.
Understanding scan profile options
Quick Setup
This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings. You can select one of these settings:
Custom
Photo - Color JPEG
Text - BW PDF
Photo - Color TIFF
Text - BW TIFF
Text/Photo - BW PDF
Text/Photo - Color PDF
To customize the scan job settings, from the Quick Setup menu, select Custom. Then change the scan settings as
needed.
Format Type
This option sets the output (PDF, JPEG, TIFF, SECURE PDF, or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
153
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and
the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Compression
This option sets the format (Zlib, JPEG or None) used to compress the scanned output file.
Default Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Default Content
affects the quality and size of your scanned file.
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
Photo—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes
to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases
the amount of information saved.
Color
This option tells the printer the color of the original documents. You can select Gray, BW (Black and White), or Color.
Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can
scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.
JPEG Quality
This option adjusts the degree of compression for scanned JPEG documents in relation to the original document.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
154
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Advanced Imaging
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output.
Contrast—Adjusts output contrast.
Shadow Detail—Adjusts the visible detail in the shadows.
Sharpness—Adjusts output sharpness.
Color Dropout—Eliminates a color from a form, improving Optical Character Recognition capabilities.
Scan edge to edge—Scans edge to edge.
Mirror Image—Creates a mirror image scan.
Negative Image—Creates a negative image scan.
JPEG Quality—Selects a JPEG quality.
Improving scan quality
Question
Tip
When should I use Text mode?
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan, and
preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents
that only contain text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a
mixture of text and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics,
and brochures.
When should I use Photo mode?
Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from
a magazine or newspaper.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
155
Understanding printer menus
Menus list
A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings. To access the menus,
touch
on the home screen.
Paper Menu
Reports
Network/Ports
Default Source
Menu Settings Page
Active NIC
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network <x> Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
NetWare Setup Page
Print Fonts
Standard Network2
Standard USB Menu3
Parallel Menu
SMTP Setup
Print Directory1
Asset Report
1
Only appears if there is an installed or mounted flash device.
2
Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network <x>.
3
This menu only appears if a standard USB port is supported.
Security
Settings
Help
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Security Audit Log
Set Date/Time
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E-mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Print All
Print Quality
Media Guide
Print Defects
Menu Map
Information Guide
Connection Guide
Moving Guide
Understanding printer menus
156
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Menu item
Description
Default Source
Tray <x>
MP Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Env
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• Only an installed paper source will appear as a menu setting.
• A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source
setting for the duration of the print job.
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When
one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Size/Type menu
Configure MP menu
Menu item
Description
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting.
• The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an automatic
paper source.
• When Manual is selected, the multipurpose feeder can be used only for
manual feed print jobs.
Substitute Size menu
Menu item
Description
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available
Notes:
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message
appearing.
Understanding printer menus
157
Paper Texture menu
Menu item
Description
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Rough Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
158
Menu item
Description
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Rough Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Custom <x> Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Menu item
Description
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded in a specific tray
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
159
Menu item
Description
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded in a specific tray
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Light Weight
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Custom <x>
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper type loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.
Understanding printer menus
160
Paper Loading menu
Menu item
Description
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type
Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Labels as the paper type
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Light as the paper type
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type
Custom <x> Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Custom <x> as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Custom <x> Loading is available only if the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided jobs.
Understanding printer menus
161
Custom Types menu
Menu item
Description
Custom Type <x>
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Labels
Envelope
Rough/Cotton
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom
Type <x> name or a user-defined Custom Name created from the
Embedded Web Server or MarkVisionTM Professional. This user-defined name
displays instead of Custom Type <x>.
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting for the Custom Type.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder
in order for you to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Labels
Envelope
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The Recycled type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder in
order for you to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Menu item
Definition
Custom Name <x>
<none>
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces a Custom Type
<x> name in the printer menus.
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Menu item
Description
Custom Scan Size <x>
Scan Size Name
Width
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)
Height
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)
Orientation
Landscape
Portrait
2 scans per side
Off
On
Specifies a custom scan size name and options. This name replaces a Custom
Scan Size <x> name in the printer menus.
Notes:
• 8.5 Inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 216 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Width.
• 14 Inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 356 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Height.
• Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
• User Default is the factory default setting for ADF Pick Roller Force.
Understanding printer menus
162
Universal Setup menu
These menu items are used to specify the height, width, and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal
Paper Size is a user-defined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options,
such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.
Menu item
Description
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identifies the units of measure
Portrait Width
3–14 inches
76–360 mm
Sets the portrait width
Notes:
• Inches is the US factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Notes:
• If the width exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum
width allowed.
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased
in 0.01-inch increments.
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1-mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14 inches
76–360 mm
Sets the portrait height
Notes:
• If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum
height allowed.
• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in
0.01-inch increments.
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1-mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specifies the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction
Notes:
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.
Reports menu
Note: When you select a menu item from the Reports menu, the indicated report prints.
Menu item
Description
Menu Settings Page
Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays, installed
memory, the total page count, alarms, timeouts, the control panel language,
the TCP/IP address, the status of supplies, the status of the network connection,
and other information
Understanding printer menus
163
Menu item
Description
Device Statistics
Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and
details about printed pages
Network Setup Page
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Note: This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network <x> Setup Page
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Notes:
• This menu item is available when more than one network option is installed.
• This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to
print servers.
Shortcut List
Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts
Fax Job Log
Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes
Fax Call Log
Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls
Copy Shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts
Profiles List
Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer
NetWare Setup Page
Prints a report containing NetWare-specific information about the network
settings
Note: This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server
installed.
Print Fonts
Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer
Print Directory
Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed correctly
and working properly.
Asset Report
Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be
scanned into an asset database.
Understanding printer menus
164
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Menu item
Description
Active NIC
Auto
<list of available network cards>
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network <x> menus
Menu item
Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch
is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu
if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
165
Menu item
Description
Network Buffer
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Sets the size of the network input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel and USB buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Std Network Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
NetWare
For descriptions and settings of the network setup menus, see the following:
Net <x> Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
Apple Talk
NetWare
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Reports menu (under the Network/Ports menu)” on page 166
“Network Card menu” on page 167
“TCP/IP menu” on page 167
“IPv6 menu” on page 169
“Wireless menu” on page 169
“AppleTalk menu” on page 170
“NetWare menu” on page 170
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Reports menu (under the Network/Ports menu)
The Reports menu item is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Understanding printer menus
166
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª Reports
Menu item
Description
Prints a report containing information about the current network setup
Print Setup Page
Print NetWare Setup Page Notes:
• The Setup Page contains information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address.
• The NetWare Setup Page menu item appears only on models that support NetWare
and shows information about NetWare settings.
Network Card menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª Network Card
Menu item
Description
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card
View Card Speed
Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card
Network Address
UAA
LAA
Lets you view the network addresses
Job Timeout
0-225 seconds
Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can take before it
is canceled
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allows the printer to print a banner page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP/IP information.
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Understanding printer menus
167
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª TCP/IP
Menu item
Description
Activate
On
Off
Activates TCP/IP
View Hostname
Lets you view the current TCP/IP hostname
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Address
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Netmask
Gateway
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Gateway
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specifies the RARP address assignment setting
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting
Enable Auto IP
Yes
No
Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using the
File Transfer Protocol.
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enables the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When this is enabled, the
printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
WINS Server Address
Lets you view or change the current WINS Server Address
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting
DNS Server Address
Lets you view or change the current DNS Server Address
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
168
Menu item
Description
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting
Note: No is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) information.
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª IPv6
Menu item
Description
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enables IPv6 in the printer
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router
View Hostname
View Address
View Router Address
Lets you view the current setting
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Network <x> ª Net <x> Setup ª Wireless
Menu item
Description
Network Mode
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specifies the network mode
Notes:
• Infrastructure mode lets the printer access a network using an access
point.
• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. Ad hoc mode configures the
printer for wireless networking directly between it and a computer.
Understanding printer menus
169
Menu item
Description
Compatibility
802.11n
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network
Choose Network
<list of available networks>
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use
View Signal Quality
Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection
View Security Mode
Lets you view the encryption method for the wireless connection.
“Disabled” indicates that the wireless network is not encrypted.
AppleTalk menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª AppleTalk
Menu item
Description
Activate
Yes
No
Activates AppleTalk support
View Name
Shows the assigned AppleTalk name
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address
Shows the assigned AppleTalk address
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Set Zone
<list of zones available on the
network>
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network
Note: The default setting is the default zone for the network. If no default zone
exists, the zone marked with an * is the default setting.
NetWare menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª NetWare
Menu item
Description
Activate
Yes
No
Activates NetWare support
View Login Name
Lets you view the assigned NetWare login name
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Print Mode
Lets you view the assigned NetWare print mode
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding printer menus
170
Menu item
Description
Network Number
Lets you view the assigned NetWare network number
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Select IPX Frame Types
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet Type II
Ethernet SNAP
Enables the Ethernet frame type setting
Packet Burst
Yes
No
Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of
multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server
NSQ/GSQ Mode
Yes
No
Specifies the NSQ/GSQ Mode setting
Note: On is the factory default setting for all menu items.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Menu item
Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
171
Menu item
Description
Sets the size of the USB input buffer
USB Buffer
Disabled
Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting.
3K to <maximum size allowed>
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the
disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether the Resource Save setting is On
or Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
USB With ENA
ENA Address
ENA Netmask
ENA Gateway
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print
server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Parallel menu
This menu appears only if an optional parallel card is installed.
Menu item
Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding printer menus
172
Menu item
Description
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch
is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <max size allowed>
Sets the size of the parallel input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the
disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Advanced Status
On
Off
Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specifies the parallel port protocol
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting disables parallel port negotiation.
Notes:
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• The Standard setting tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Understanding printer menus
173
Menu item
Description
Honor Init
On
Off
Determines whether or not the printer honors printer hardware initialization
requests from the computer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Determines whether the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge
of strobe
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only if a standard or optional parallel port is available.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Parallel With ENA
ENA Address
ENA Netmask
ENA Gateway
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print
server that is attached to the printer using a parallel cable.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through a parallel port.
Serial <x> menu
This menu appears only if an optional serial card is installed.
Menu item
Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding printer menus
174
Menu item
Description
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch
is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• When the On setting is used, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data
is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• When the Auto setting is used, the printer examines data, determines the
format, and then processes it appropriately.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the size of the serial input buffer
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting.
3K to <maximum size allowed>
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the
disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, USB, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Serial Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XON/XOFF/DTRDSR
Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port
Notes:
•
•
•
•
DTR is the factory default setting.
DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Understanding printer menus
175
Menu item
Description
Robust XON
On
Off
Determines whether or not the printer communicates availability to the computer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port
Data Bits
7
8
Specifies the number of data bits that are sent in each transmission frame
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames
Honor DSR
On
Off
Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal. DSR is a handshaking signal
used by most serial cables.
Notes:
• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are displayed only in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option or Serial
Option 2 menus.
Note: 7 is the factory default setting.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data
created by electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray
characters to print. Select On to prevent stray characters from printing.
• This menu item appears only if Serial RS-232/RS-422 is set to RS 232.
Understanding printer menus
176
SMTP Setup menu
Use the following menu to configure the SMTP server.
Menu item
Description
Primary SMTP Gateway
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port. Range is 1-65536.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying
to send the e-mail
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address
Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in e-mail sent by the
printer
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting for Use SSL.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, your SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM-MD5
Digest-MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specifies the type of user authentication required
Device-Initiated E-mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the
SMTP server. Some SMTP servers require credentials in order to send email.
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Notes:
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
• None is the factory default setting for Device-Initiated E-mail.
• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when "Use Device SMTP Credentials" is selected.
Understanding printer menus
177
Security menu
Miscellaneous menu
Menu item
Description
Login Restrictions
Login failures
1-10 (3 attempts)
Failure time frame
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out
1-60 (5 minutes)
Lockout time
1-60 (5 minutes)
Panel Login Timeout
1-900 (3 seconds)
Remote Login Timeout
1-120 (10 minutes)
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. 3 attempts is the factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts
can be made before users are locked out. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home
screen before automatically logging the user off. 3 seconds is the factory default
setting.
• “Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface (for example,
the Web page) can remain idle before automatically logging the user off. 10
minutes is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Menu item
Description
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered
Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Limits the amount of time a confidential job stays in the printer before it is deleted
Notes:
• Off is the default setting.
• This menu item appears only if a printer hard disk is installed.
• Once a limit is reached, the jobs for that user name and that PIN are deleted.
Notes:
• Off is the default setting.
• If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential jobs reside on the
printer RAM or printer hard disk, the expiration time for those print jobs does
not change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned off, all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted.
Understanding printer menus
178
Security Audit Log menu
Menu item
Description
Export Log
Enables an authorized user to export the security log
Notes:
• To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached
to the printer.
• From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer.
Delete Log
Delete now
Do not delete
Specifies whether audit logs are deleted
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
Yes
No
Remote Syslog Facility
0-23
Severity of events to log
0-7
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created
Note: Delete Now is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Enable audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
• Enable remote syslog determines if logs are being sent to a remote server. No
is the factory default setting.
• Remote syslog facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
• With the security audit log activated, the severity value of each event is
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
Set Date/Time menu
Menu item
Description
View Date/Time
Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer
Set Date/Time
<input date/time>
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM format.
Time Zone
<list of time zones>
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Observe DST
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
179
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Menu item
Description
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Turkce
Korean
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media
Note: All languages may not be available for all printers.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
• The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job by duplexing each page. Performance
may be affected, but print quality is not.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loaded
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible.
Understanding printer menus
180
Menu item
Description
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard
Notes:
• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
Country select screen, the default becomes No.
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Turkce
Custom Key <x>
Accents/Symbols Tab
On
Off
Russian/Polish Tab
On
Off
Korean Tab
On
Off
Chinese Pinyin Tab
On
Off
Chinese Zhuyin Tab
On
Off
Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer
control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to
accent marks and symbols from the printer control panel
keyboard.
Paper Sizes
U.S.
Metric
Specifies the printer factory default measurements. The default is
determined by the country/region selection in the initial setup
wizard.
Understanding printer menus
181
Menu item
Description
Scan to PC Port Range
<port range>
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port-blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text <x>
<text entry>
Cartridge levels on status screen
On
Off
Black Toner
When to Display
Display
Do not display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
<text entry>
Alternate Message
<text entry>
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of
the home screen
For the Left side and Right side options, choose from the following
options:
Model Name
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text <x>
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
• Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display.
Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
The displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service
Errors can be customized with the following options:
Activate
Yes
No
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
<text entry>
Alternate Message
<text entry>
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Activate.
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Understanding printer menus
182
Menu item
Description
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Additional buttons can be added to the Home screen, and default
buttons can be removed.
Available selections for each button are:
Display
Do Not Display
Date Format
MM-DD-YYYY
DD-MM-YYYY
YYYY-MM-DD
Formats the printer date
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Formats the printer time
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen
One Page Copy
On
Off
Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time
Output Lighting
Standard Bin LED
Normal/Standby Mode
Bright
Dim
Off
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
Off
Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional
output bin
Show Bookmarks
Yes
No
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs
area
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• In Normal/Standby Mode, the factory default is Bright.
• In Power Saver Mode, the factory default is Dim.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When On is selected,
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Understanding printer menus
183
Menu item
Description
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during
copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan to USB
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image will be removed.
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and
operating properly for this menu item to be available.
• On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the Allow
Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam
occurs in the ADF
Notes:
• If Job level is selected, the entire job must be rescanned if any
pages jam.
• If Page level is selected, rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Contact Name
Specifies a contact name for the printer
Location
Specifies the location of the printer
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator
intervention
Available selections for each alarm type are:
Off
Single
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single
sounds three quick beeps.
• Off is the factory default setting for Toner Alarm. Off means
no alarm will sound.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
2–240
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system
enters a lower power state
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
184
Menu item
Description
Timeouts
Power Saver Mode
Disabled
2–240
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before some systems
begin entering a minimum power state.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the printer display to a Ready state
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the print
job
Notes:
• 30 minutes is the factory default setting.
• Power Saver does not interact with Standby Mode.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new
print jobs are waiting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS
emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation
print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job
Notes:
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL or
PPDS emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
Disabled
5–255
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue
Notes:
• 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is
installed.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain
offline situations when not resolved within the specified time
period
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• 5–255 is a range of time in seconds.
Understanding printer menus
185
Menu item
Description
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages
is needed for other printer tasks.
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
On
Off
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
otherwise
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page when
there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore
keeps the user-defined settings.
• Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default
settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads
stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory
or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
Copy Settings menu
Menu item
Description
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Printed Image
Text
Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original
documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.
• Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures.
This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction
of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the
amount of information saved.
• Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images. Printed
Image converts the images to halftone. Halftoning makes a grayscale or color
image printable by transforming it to a pattern of small spots with a limited
number of colors.
• Text emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white
background.
Understanding printer menus
186
Menu item
Description
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two-sided) or simplex (onesided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex
Notes:
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied
page will have printing on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied
page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original is six sheets,
the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copied
page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original draft is
three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet, then the copy
is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copy
mimics the original exactly.
Paper Saver
Off
2 on 1 Portrait
2 on 1 Landscape
4 on 1 Portrait
4 on 1 Landscape
Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Specifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the margins
Collate
On
Off
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies
of the job
Staple
On
Off
Enables stapling
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
187
Menu item
Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Copy To Source
Tray <x>
Single Sheet Feeder
Multi Sheet Feeder
Auto Size Match
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Specifies a paper source
Darkness
1–9
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Specifies which output bin receives the copy after it is printed
Number of Copies
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
188
Menu item
Description
Header/Footer
Top left
Top left
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the top left of the page
Header/Footer
Top middle
Top middle
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the middle of the page
Header/Footer
Top right
Top right
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the top right of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Top left.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Top middle.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Top right.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Understanding printer menus
189
Menu item
Description
Header/Footer
Bottom left
Bottom left
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom left of the page
Header/Footer
Bottom middle
Bottom middle
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom middle of the page
Header/Footer
Bottom right
Bottom right
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom right of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Understanding printer menus
190
Menu item
Description
Overlay
Off
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job
Custom Overlay
Specifies custom overlay text
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Auto Center
On
Off
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
191
Menu item
Description
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Shadow Detail
0–4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to copying
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a copy
Sample Copy
On
Off
Creates a sample copy of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Menu item
Description
Station Name
Specifies the name of the fax within the printer
Station Number
Specifies a number associated with the fax
Station ID
Station Name
Station Number
Specifies how the fax is identified to recipients in the fax header
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone
hand set
Notes:
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.
• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Understanding printer menus
192
Menu item
Description
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly sent
All send
Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax
jobs
Notes:
• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
• “Mostly sent” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specifies whether the user may cancel fax jobs
Caller ID
FSK
DTMF
Specifies the type of caller ID being used
Note: If Cancel Faxes is not enabled, it does not appear as an option.
Notes:
• FSK is the factory default setting.
• This option appears only when the selected country/region supports multiple
caller ID patterns.
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number
Digits to mask
0–58
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”
setting.
Understanding printer menus
193
Fax Cover Page
Menu item
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never Use
Always Use
Include To field
On
Off
Include From field
On
Off
From
Include Message field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer <x>
Footer <x>
Description
Configures the fax cover page
Note: Off is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Fax Send Settings
Menu item
Description
Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality,
but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
194
Menu item
Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Duplex
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Content
Text
Text/Photo
Photograph
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax
Notes:
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print.
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Dial Prefix
A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule <x>
Establishes a dialing prefix rule
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
195
Menu item
Description
Redial Frequency
1–200
Specifies the number of minutes between redials
Behind a PABX
Yes
No
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer
Driver to fax
Yes
No
Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
this menu item to be available.
• On is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
this menu item to be available.
• Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
196
Menu item
Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during faxing, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast of the output
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Shadow Detail
-4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to faxing
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the sharpness of a fax
Enable Color Fax Scans
On by default
Never use
Always use
Off by default
Enables color faxing
Auto Convert Color Faxes to
Mono Faxes
On
Off
Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
197
Fax Receive Settings
Menu item
Description
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Allows a fax to be held until toner or supplies are replaced
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source
Paper Source
Auto
Tray <x>
Multi-Purpose Feeder
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an
incoming fax
Separator Sheets
None
After job
Before job
Places a sheet of paper before or after a received fax.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray <x>
Manual feeder
Specifies a paper source.
Sides (Duplex)
On
Off
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs
Fax Footer
On
Off
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received
Fax Forwarding
Forward
Print
Print and Forward
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a hard disk is supported and installed.
• None is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray <x> is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
198
Menu item
Description
Forward to
Fax
E-mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded
Forward to Shortcut
Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail,
FPT, LDSS, or eSF)
Block No Name Fax
On
Off
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified
Banned Fax List
Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off
Lets you receive a color fax
Note: This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Log Settings
Menu item
Description
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Enables automatic printing of fax logs
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Logs print after every 200 jobs.
• On is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray <x> is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
199
Menu item
Description
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name
returned
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enables access to the Fax Job log
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Enables access to the Fax Call log
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Speaker Settings
Menu item
Description
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Notes:
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
• On until Connected is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and issues
a noise until the fax connection is made.
• Always On turns the speaker on.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Controls the volume setting
Ringer Volume
On
Off
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Distinctive Rings
Menu item
Description
Single Ring
On
Off
Answers calls with a one-ring pattern
Double Ring
On
Off
Answers calls with a double-ring pattern
Triple Ring
On
Off
Answers calls with a triple-ring pattern
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
200
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Fax Server Setup
Menu item
Description
To Format
Reply Address
Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen
Subject
Message
Primary SMTP Gateway
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Specifies the image type for scan to fax
Content
Text
Text/Photo
Photograph
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
201
Menu item
Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog Receive
On
Off
Enables analog fax receive
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
E-mail Settings menu
Menu item
Description
E-mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
Specifies e-mail server information
E-mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the creator of the e-mail
Note: The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
202
Menu item
Description
E-mail Server Setup
Max e-mail size
0–65535 KB
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes
E-mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit
E-mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Sends an e-mail only when the address contains the domain name, such as a
company domain name
Note: E-mail above the specified size is not sent.
Note: E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
E-mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
Base file name
Web Link
Defines the e-mail server path name; for example: /directory/path
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the file
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e-mail
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e-mail
The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path name: * : ? <
> |.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print.
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Color
Gray
Color
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
203
Menu item
Description
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Notes:
•
•
•
•
Text Default
5–90
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
204
Menu item
Description
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
E-mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specifies how the images will be sent
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For
a multiple-page scan to e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Manual Env
MP Feeder
Specifies a paper source for printing e-mail logs
E-mail Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when
Color is set to Off.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
this menu item to be available.
• Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
this menu item to be available.
• Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
205
Menu item
Description
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the E-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or
decrease the dropout
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast of the output
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Shadow Detail
-4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image
Use cc:/bcc:
On
Off
Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
206
FTP Settings menu
Menu item
Description
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the FTP file
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Color
Gray
Color
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
207
Menu item
Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Notes:
•
•
•
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
208
Menu item
Description
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For
a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Manual Env
MP Feeder
Specifies a paper source for FTP logs
FTP bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when
Color is set to Off
Base File Name
Lets you enter a base file name
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
this menu item to be available
• Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
this menu item to be available
• Off is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
209
Menu item
Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or
decrease the dropout
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast of the output
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Shadow Detail
0–4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Menu item
Description
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the file
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
210
Menu item
Description
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print.
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Color
Gray
Color
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Understanding printer menus
211
Menu item
Description
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and the
quality of the image.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to Text, Text/Photo, and all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For
a multiple-page scan to USB job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Scan bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when
Color is set to Off
Base File Name
Lets you enter a base file name
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
this menu item to be available
• Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
212
Menu item
Description
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
this menu item to be available
• Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or
decrease the dropout
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast of the output
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Shadow Detail
0–4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Menu item
Description
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to print
Understanding printer menus
213
Menu item
Description
Paper Source
Tray <x>
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print from the
flash drive
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing)
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of
the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages
and the top edge of landscape pages.
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages
and the left edge of landscape pages.
Orientation
Auto
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the print job
N-up (pages/side)
Off
2 Up
3 Up
4 Up
6 Up
9 Up
12 Up
16 Up
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper.
This is also referred to as Paper Saver.
N-up Border
None
Solid
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up
N-up Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Understanding printer menus
214
Menu item
Description
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected
Separator Sheet Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Specifies a paper source
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Menu item
Description
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
PPDS Emulation
Sets the default printer language
Notes:
• PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print
jobs. PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing
print jobs.
• PCL is the factory default printer language.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Sets the logical and physical printable area
Notes:
• This menu does not appear if Edge to Edge is enabled in the
printer Setup menu.
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non-printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
• The Whole Page setting allows the image to be moved into
the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.
• The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using a
PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed
using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Understanding printer menus
215
Menu item
Description
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Sets the storage location for downloads
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting.
• Storing downloads in flash memory places them in
permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory even
when the printer is turned off.
• Storing downloads in RAM is temporary.
• This menu appears only if a flash option is installed.
Resource Save
On
Off
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job
that requires more memory than is available
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.
• The On setting retains the downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory,
38 Memory Full appears, and downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected
Notes:
• Alphabetical is the factory default setting.
• Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer
control panel.
Finishing menu
Menu item
Description
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specifies whether duplex (2-sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs
Notes:
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• To set 2-sided printing from the software program: for Windows users, click
File ª Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup; for
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
Print dialog and pop-up menus.
Understanding printer menus
216
Menu item
Description
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of
the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages
and the top edge of landscape pages.
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages
and the left edge of landscape pages.
Copies
1–999
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
• Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies
menu setting.
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, a blank page is inserted between
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a
document for notes.
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Multi-Purpose Feeder
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
Multi-Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Understanding printer menus
217
Menu item
Description
N-up (pages-side)
Off
2-Up
3-Up
4-Up
6-Up
9-Up
12-Up
16-Up
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper
N-up Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up (pages-sides)
Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page sheet
N-up Border
None
Solid
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up (pages-sides)
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Menu item
Description
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specifies the printed output resolution
Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both Directions
Enhances the printed quality of small fonts and graphics
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting. The printer driver default is 1200 IQ.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
•
Off is the factory default setting.
Fonts applies this setting only to text.
Horizontally darkens horizontal lines of text and images.
Vertically darkens vertical lines of text and images.
Both Directions darkens horizontal and vertical lines on text and images.
Understanding printer menus
218
Menu item
Description
Toner Darkness
1–10
Lightens or darkens the printed output
Notes:
• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network
printer IP address in a browser window.
Gray Correction
Auto
Off
Adjusts the gray value of printed output
Brightness
-6 to +6
Adjusts or darkens printed output and conserves toner
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• A negative value will darken text, images, and graphics. A positive value will
lighten them and conserve toner.
Contrast
0–5
Adjusts the degree of difference between levels of gray in printed output
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• Higher settings show more difference between levels of gray.
Utilities menu
Menu item
Description
Format Flash
Yes
No
Formats the flash memory. Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing
a flash memory option card in the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory
is formatting.
Notes:
• A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating
properly for this menu item to be available. The flash memory option card must
not be Read/Write or Write protected.
• Selecting Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
Understanding printer menus
219
Menu item
Description
Hex Trace
Activate
Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem
Notes:
• When Activate is selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal
and character representation and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of black on a page. The estimate
is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Menu item
Description
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Menu item
Description
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Scales page content to fit the selected paper size
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Prints annotations in a PDF
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Menu item
Description
Print PS Error
On
Off
Prints a page containing the PostScript error
Font Priority
Resident
Flash
Establishes the font search order
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• A formatted optional flash memory card must be installed in the printer
and operating properly for this menu item to be available.
• The optional flash memory card cannot be Read/Write, Write, or password
protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Understanding printer menus
220
PCL Emul menu
Menu item
Description
Font Source
Resident
Download
Flash
All
Specifies the set of fonts available
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of
fonts downloaded into RAM.
• Download appears only if downloaded fonts exist. It shows all the fonts
downloaded into RAM.
• Flash appears only if an optional flash memory card containing fonts is
installed.
• An optional flash memory card must be properly formatted and cannot be
Read/Write, Write, or password protected.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
<list of fonts>
Lets you view or change the setting from a selection list
Symbol Set
<list of symbol sets>
Lets you view or change the setting from a selection list
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts
Notes:
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals
approximately 1/72 of an inch.
• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25-point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts
Notes:
•
•
•
•
10 is the factory default setting.
Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting.
• Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
Understanding printer menus
221
Menu item
Description
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international factory default
setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines
per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired Paper Size
and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Sets the printer to print on A4-size paper
Notes:
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10-pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray <x>
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Man Env
Off
None
0–199
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• None is not an available selection. It is displayed only when it is selected by
the PCL 5 interpreter.
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command.
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding printer menus
222
Menu item
Description
Lets you view the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder
Tray Renumber
View Factory Def
Notes:
Multipurpose feeder default = 8
• The printer supports one standard 250-sheet tray and can have only one
Tray 1 default = 1
optional drawer installed, either the 250- or 550-sheet drawer. Therefore,
Tray 2 default = 4
only Tray 1 and Tray 2 of the Tray values apply to your printer
Tray 3 default = 5
• The factory default settings appear even if the source is not installed.
Tray 4 default = 20
Tray 5 default = 21
Envelope default = 6
Manual paper default = 2
Manual envelope default = 3
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings
PPDS menu
Menu item
Description
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Sets the orientation of the text and graphics on the page
Lines per Page
1–255
Sets the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting.
• Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Notes:
• 64 is the factory default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines
per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired Paper
Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
Lines per Inch
0.25–30.00
Sets the number of lines that print per inch
Notes:
• 6 is the factory default setting.
• Lines per Inch can be increased or decreased in 0.25-inch increments
Page Format
Print
Whole
Sets the logical and physical printable area of the page
Notes:
• Print is the factory default setting. Print data maintains its position with
respect to edge of the paper.
• When Whole is selected, document margins are calculated from the top
left corner of the physical edge of the page.
• Printing does not occur outside the printable area.
Understanding printer menus
223
Menu item
Description
Character Set
1
2
Specifies a default character set for PPDS print jobs
Notes:
• 2 is the factory default setting. Character Set 2 is composed of printable
characters and symbols used in non-US English languages.
• When Characters Set 1 is selected, values given to the printer are
interpreted as printer commands.
Best Fit
On
Off
Replaces a missing font with a similar font
Tray 1 Renumber
Off
Tray 2
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders
Note: On is the factory default setting. If the requested font is not found, the
printer will use a similar font.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Tray 2 is displayed only when it is installed.
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)
after a line feed (LF) control command
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Understanding printer menus
224
HTML menu
Menu item
Font Name
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Description
Intl CG Times
Sets the default font for HTML documents
Intl Courier
Notes:
Intl Univers
• The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do not specify a
Joanna MT
font.
Letter Gothic
• The following fonts appear only if the appropriate DBCS font card is
Lubalin Graph
installed: HG-GothicB, MSung-Light, MD_DotumChe, and MingMTMarigold
Light.
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
Menu item
Description
Font Size
1–255 pt
Sets the default font size for HTML documents
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1-point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scales the default font for HTML documents
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Sets the page margin for HTML documents
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments.
Understanding printer menus
225
Menu item
Description
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Menu item
Description
Auto Fit
On
Off
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation
Invert
On
Off
Inverts bi-tonal monochrome images
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Rev Portrait
Rev Landscape
Sets the image orientation
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The font size can be increased in 1-point increments.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
The Help menu consists of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs. They contain reference information
about using the printer and performing tasks. You may select to print each one individually, or select Print all
guides to print all of them at one time.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available on the
Software and Documentation CD.
Understanding printer menus
226
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove all paper from the printer.
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before beginning a new print job.
Cleaning the scanner glass
If you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images, clean the areas shown.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
1
White underside of the ADF cover
2
White underside of the scanner cover
3
Scanner glass
4
ADF glass
Maintaining the printer
227
3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.
4 Close the scanner cover.
Cleaning the ADF separator rollers
After you have copied over 50,000 copies using the ADF, clean the ADF separator rollers.
1 Open the ADF cover.
2 Unlock the separator roll.
3 Remove the separator roll.
4 Use a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water to wipe the separator rollers.
Maintaining the printer
228
5 Reinstall the separator roll.
6 Lock the separator roll.
7 Close the ADF cover.
Adjusting scanner registration
Scanner Registration is a process to align the scan area with the paper location. To manually adjust the scanner
registration:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Clean the scanner glass and backing material.
3 Hold down
and
until the progress bar appears.
4 Release the buttons.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Diagnostic menu appears.
5 Touch the up or down arrow until Scanner Test appears.
6 Touch Scanner Test.
7 Touch the up or down arrow until Scanner Manual Registration appears.
8 Touch Scanner Manual Registration.
Maintaining the printer
229
9 Touch the left and right arrows to change the settings.
10 Touch Submit.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until
you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct sunlight
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
High humidity above 80%
Salty air
Corrosive gases
Heavy dust
Checking the status of supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch Status/Supplies.
Note: If Status/Supplies is not on the home screen, then print a menu settings page to review the status of the
supplies.
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in
the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status. The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.
Maintaining the printer
230
Ordering supplies
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by the use of a supply or replacement item not produced by the
manufacturer of this printer is not covered under warranty. Degraded print quality may result from using supplies
or replacement items not produced by the manufacturer of this printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.
Printer attached to a network
1 Type your printer IP address in your Web browser to launch the Dell Configuration Web Tool.
2 Click www.dell.com/supplies.
Printer attached locally to a computer
1 Click
or Start.
2 Click All Programs or Programs, and then select the printer program folder from the list.
3 Select Printer Home.
4 Choose your printer from the printer drop-down list.
5 Click Dell Printer Supplies Reorder Application.
The Order Toner Cartridges window opens.
6 Choose your printer model from the list.
7 Enter your Dell printer Service Tag number.
Note: Your Service Tag number is located inside the front cover of your printer.
8 Click Visit Dell's cartridge ordering website.
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
When 88 Cartridge low appears, or when you experience faded print, remove the toner cartridge. Firmly shake
it side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner, and then reinsert it and continue printing.
When shaking the cartridge no longer improves the print quality, replace the toner cartridge.
Note: You can check to see approximately how much toner is left in your cartridge by printing a menu settings page.
Maintaining the printer
231
To replace the toner cartridge:
1 Open the front door by pressing the button on the left side of the printer and lowering the door.
2 Press the button on the base of the photoconductor kit. Pull the toner cartridge up and out using the handle.
3 Unpack the new toner cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing a toner cartridge, do not leave the photoconductor kit exposed
to direct light for an extended period of time. Extended light exposure can cause print quality problems.
4 Rotate the cartridge in all directions to distribute the toner.
Maintaining the printer
232
5 Install the new toner cartridge by aligning the rollers on the toner cartridge with the arrows on the tracks of the
photoconductor kit. Push the toner cartridge in as far as it will go. The cartridge clicks into place when correctly
installed.
6 Close the front door.
Replacing the photoconductor kit
The printer automatically notifies you before the photoconductor kit reaches a page maximum by showing 84 PC
Kit life warning or 84 Replace PC Kit on the display. You can also see the status of the photoconductor
kit by printing a menu settings page.
When 84 PC Kit life warning or 84 Replace PC Kit first appears, you should immediately order a new
photoconductor kit. While the printer may continue to function properly after the photoconductor kit has reached
its official end-of-life, print quality significantly decreases.
Note: The photoconductor kit is one item only.
Maintaining the printer
233
1 Open the front door by pressing the button on the left side of the printer and lowering the front door.
2 Pull the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge out of the printer as a unit by pulling on the toner cartridge
handle.
Note: The photoconductor kit and toner cartridge form a unit.
Place the unit on a flat, clean surface.
3 Press the button on the base of the photoconductor kit. Pull the toner cartridge up and out using the handle.
Maintaining the printer
234
4 Unpack the new photoconductor kit. Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum.
5 Insert the toner cartridge into the photoconductor kit by aligning the rollers on the toner cartridge with the tracks.
Push the toner cartridge until it clicks into place.
6 Install the unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the guides of the unit with the arrows in the printer.
Push the unit as far as it will go.
Maintaining the printer
235
7 After you replace the photoconductor kit, reset the photoconductor counter. To reset the counter, see the
instruction sheet that came with the new photoconductor kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Resetting the photoconductor counter without replacing the photoconductor
may damage your printer and void your warranty.
8 Close the front door.
Recycling Dell products
To return Dell products for recycling:
1 Visit our Web site at www.dell.com/recycling.
2 Select your country from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Moving the printer to another location
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to move it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
Remove all printer options before moving the printer.
Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it. For more information, see
“Selecting a location for the printer” on page 20.
Maintaining the printer
236
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must be able to support its weight and have a large enough surface to support
the full footprint of the printer.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer
237
Administrative support
Using the Embedded Web Server
If the printer is installed on a network, the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:
•
•
•
•
•
Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel
Checking the status of the printer supplies
Configuring printer settings
Configuring network settings
Viewing reports
To access the Embedded Web Server, type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Checking the device status
From the Device Status page of the Embedded Web Server, it is possible to see tray settings, the level of toner in the
toner cartridge, the percentage of life remaining in the photoconductor kit, and capacity measurements of certain
printer parts. To access the device status:
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in
the TCP/IP section.
2 Click the Device Status tab.
Setting up e-mail alerts
You can have the printer send you an e-mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be
changed, added, or unjammed.
To set up e-mail alerts:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click E-mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items for notification, and type in the e-mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: See your system support person to set up the e-mail server.
Administrative support
238
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Restoring the factory default settings
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before you
restore the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 52.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
setting. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and Network/Port menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Factory Defaults appears.
6 Touch the left or right arrow until Restore Now appears.
7 Touch Submit.
8 Touch
.
Administrative support
239
Clearing jams
By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps
outlined in this section.
To clear a jam message and resume printing, clear the entire paper path, and then touch Continue. If Jam Recovery
is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam Recovery is set to Auto, then the
printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available.
Understanding jam messages and locations
Note: To resolve any message, all paper or specialty media must be cleared from the entire paper path.
Open doors and remove trays to access jam areas. The following illustration shows possible jam areas:
Access point Description
1
Push the button to open the front door. Inside are the toner cartridge and photoconductor kit.
2
Standard exit bin
3
Front door
4
Manual or multipurpose feeder door
5
Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)
6
Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 2)
7
Rear door
8
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Jam message numbers and how to access each jam
Jam number
To access the jam
200-201
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove Tray 1.
• Open the front door, and then remove the photoconductor kit.
202
Open the front door, and then open the rear door.
Clearing jams
240
Jam number
To access the jam
231
Open the front door, and then open the rear door.
233
Remove Tray 1, and then depress the lever.
Note: For alternative access to the jam, open the front door, and then open the rear door.
234
Try one or more of the following:
• Open the front door, and then open the rear door.
• Remove Tray 1, and then depress the lever.
235
Remove the jam from the standard exit bin.
240-249
Remove Tray 2.
250
Open the multipurpose feeder door.
251
Open the multipurpose feeder door.
290-295
Try one or more of the following:
• Open the ADF cover, and then remove the separator roll.
• Open the scanner cover.
• Remove the ADF tray.
200 and 201 paper jams
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1 Pull the tray completely out.
Clearing jams
241
2 Remove the jam if you see it here.
3 If you do not see the jam, open the front door, and then remove the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.
4 Lift the flap at the front of the printer, and then remove any jammed sheets.
Clearing jams
242
5 If you do not see any jammed sheets, open the rear door.
6 Remove the jam.
7 Close the rear door.
8 Insert the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.
9 Close the front door.
10 Touch Continue.
202 paper jam
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam. If the paper is exiting the printer, then pull the paper out,
and then touch Continue.
Clearing jams
243
If the paper is not exiting the printer:
1 Pull down the rear door.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
3 Close the rear door.
4 Touch Continue.
231 paper jam
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1 Open the front door.
2 Open the rear door.
Clearing jams
244
3 Remove the jam.
4 Close the rear door.
5 Close the front door.
6 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
245
233 paper jam
1 Remove the tray from the printer.
2 Locate the lever shown, and then pull it down to release and remove the jammed sheets.
3 Insert the tray.
4 Touch Continue.
If this does not clear the jam, complete the steps in “231 paper jam” on page 244.
234 paper jam
A single jam or multiple jams are in the duplex area of the printer. To locate and remove the jammed sheets, complete
all the steps in:
• “231 paper jam” on page 244
• “233 paper jam” on page 246
Clearing jams
246
235 paper jam
1 Gently pull the jammed sheet out of the standard exit bin.
2 Touch Continue.
240–249 paper jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Pull the standard tray out.
3 Remove any jammed paper.
4 Insert the tray, and then touch Continue.
5 If the jam message persists, then pull out any optional trays.
Clearing jams
247
6 Remove the jammed paper, and then insert the trays.
7 Touch Continue.
250 paper jam
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Remove the paper from the multipurpose feeder.
3 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4 Load the paper into the multipurpose feeder.
5 Slide the paper guide toward the inside of the tray until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper.
6 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
248
251 paper jam
A sheet of paper failed to feed from the multipurpose feeder. If it is visible, gently pull the jammed sheet out.
If the sheet is not visible, complete the following steps:
1 Open the front door, and then remove the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.
2 Lift the flap at the front of the printer, and then remove any jams.
3 Reinsert the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.
4 Close the front door.
5 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
249
290–294 paper jams
Clearing jams under the ADF cover
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
2 Open the ADF cover.
3 Unlock the separator roll.
4 Remove the separator roll.
Clearing jams
250
5 Remove the jammed paper.
6 Reinstall the separator roll.
7 Lock the separator roll.
Clearing jams
251
8 Close the ADF cover.
9 Touch Continue.
Clearing ADF jams by lifting the scanner cover
1 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.
2 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
252
Clearing ADF duplex jams
If you are making a two-sided copy in the ADF, and your original document jams, it may be necessary to perform the
following steps to clear the jam:
1 Remove the ADF input tray.
2 Pull out the jammed paper by pulling the sheet on the bottom.
3 Reinstall the ADF input tray.
4 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
253
Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
• All options are properly installed.
• The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only
diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
If Ready does not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.
Understanding printer messages
Change <input src> to <Custom Type Name>
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the
paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
• Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
• Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
• Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are
specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting
254
Change <input src> to <Custom String>
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the
paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
• Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
• Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
• Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are
specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Change <input src> to <size>
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the
paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
• Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
• Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
• Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are
specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Change <input src> to <type> <size>
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the
paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
• Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
• Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
• Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are
specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Check tray <x> connection
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1
2
3
4
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the tray.
Reattach the tray.
Troubleshooting
255
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
6 Restart the printer.
If the error occurs again:
1
2
3
4
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the tray.
Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the tray.
Close door or insert cartridge
The cartridge is missing or not installed correctly. Insert the cartridge and close all doors and covers.
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard
disk must be reformatted.
Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear the
message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
The printer is not detecting an analog phone line, so the fax is disabled. Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been
restarted.
Fax memory full
There is not enough memory to send the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting
256
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Some held jobs are not restored. They stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored
Since the time the jobs were stored on the printer hard disk something has changed in the printer to invalidate the
held jobs. Possible changes include:
•
•
•
•
The printer firmware has been updated.
Paper input, output, or duplex options needed for the print job were removed.
The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the port.
The printer hard disk contains jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Load <input src> with <Custom Type Name>
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting
257
Load <input src> with <Custom String>
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load <input src> with <size>
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load <input src> with <type> <size>
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom Type Name>
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom String>
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting
258
Load Manual Feeder with <size>
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with <type> <size>
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
Restore Held Jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.
Unsupported USB device, please remove
Remove the unrecognized USB device.
Unsupported USB hub, please remove
Remove the unrecognized USB hub.
Unsupported disk
An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed. Remove the unsupported device, and then install a supported
one.
30.yy Invalid refill, change cartridge
An unsupported, refilled toner cartridge is installed. Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a new one.
Troubleshooting
259
31.yy Replace defective or missing cartridge
The toner cartridge is either missing or not functioning properly.
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
• Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a new one.
32.yy Cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.
34 Short paper
Try one or more of the following:
•
•
•
•
Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray.
Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray.
Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
Check the Print Properties or Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size
and type.
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the
paper is large enough for the data being printed.
• Cancel the current print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit
the menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
• Install additional memory.
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting
260
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
Fax failed
The fax failed to be sent. Wait for the message to clear.
50 PPDS font error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• The printer cannot find a requested font. From the PPDS menu, select Best Fit, and then select On. The printer
will find a similar font and reformat the affected text.
• Cancel the current print job.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Troubleshooting
261
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
54 Network <x> software error
<x> is the number of the network connection.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
55 Unsupported option in slot <x>
<x> is a slot on the printer system board.
Try one or more of the following:
1 Turn the printer power off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer power back on.
56 Parallel port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the parallel port.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the serial port.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
Troubleshooting
262
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 USB port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the USB port.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
58 Too many flash options installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many trays attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
59 Incompatible tray <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the specified tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.
Troubleshooting
263
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a larger printer hard disk.
63 Unformatted disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the printer hard disk.
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.
80 Routine maintenance needed
The printer needs to have routine maintenance done. Order a maintenance kit, which contains all the items necessary
to replace the pick rollers, the charge roll, the transfer roller, and the fuser.
84 PC Kit life warning
The photoconductor kit is near exhaustion.
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the photoconductor kit.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
84 Replace PC Kit
The photoconductor kit is exhausted. Install a new photoconductor kit.
88 Cartridge low
The toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware
card.
Troubleshooting
264
Scanner ADF Cover Open
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.
Scan Document Too Long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared. Replace the original documents in the scanner
to restart the scan job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears. This cancels the job and clears the
message.
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately
after the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully
scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail,
or FTP.
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active. The message clears. A new scan job containing the same parameters
as the previous job starts.
Paper Change: Load Tray<x> <paper type>
The printer is set to print on a paper type that is different from what is loaded in Tray 1. Load Tray 1 with the correct
paper type, or change the paper type settings in the Machine Settings menu or Print Properties to match what is
loaded in Tray 1.
290-295.yy scanner jam
Clear all original documents from the scanner.
293 Replace all originals if restarting job.
The scanner was instructed to scan using the ADF but there is no paper in the ADF. Load paper in the ADF.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue if no scan job is active when the attendance message appears. This clears the message.
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the attendance message appears. This cancels the job and
clears the message.
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the flatbed immediately after
the last successfully scanned page.
Troubleshooting
265
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully
scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail,
or FTP.
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active and you are able to restart the job. The message clears. A new scan job
containing the same parameters as the previous job starts.
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open
Close the scanner cover.
294 ADF Jam
This jam location may also be identified as 294.04 Duplex Sensor Off Jam, 294.05 Scan Sensor Off
Jam, or 294.06 ADF Backfeed Jam. To clear this jam:
1 Remove all pages from the ADF.
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.
2 Flex and fan the pages.
3 Place the pages in the ADF.
4 Adjust the ADF guides.
5 From the printer control panel, press
.
840.01 Scanner Disabled
This message indicates that the scanner was disabled by the system support person, or the scanner detected a
hardware error and disabled itself.
840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled
The printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it.
1 Remove all pages from the ADF.
2 Turn the printer off.
3 Wait 15 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Note: If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message, then contact your system support
person.
4 Place the document in the ADF, and then adjust the paper guides.
5 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
6 Change the copy settings as needed.
7 Touch Copy It.
Troubleshooting
266
Solving printing problems
Multiple-language PDFs do not print
The documents contain unavailable fonts.
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon.
The Print dialog appears.
3 Select Print as image.
4 Click OK.
Jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready or Power Saver appears on the display before sending a job to print.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
• If you are using a USB port, make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible
printer software.
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check
the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person
to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED PRINTER CABLE
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Troubleshooting
267
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGES PRINT
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then print it again.
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Job takes longer than expected to print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the
job.
CHANGE THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING TO OFF
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears.
6 Touch Print Recovery.
7 Touch the right arrow next to Page Protect until Off appears.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch
.
Troubleshooting
268
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Incorrect characters print
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS NOT IN HEX TRACE MODE
If Ready Hex appears on the display, then you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the
printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity
of images, and the number of pages in the job.
Troubleshooting
269
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Unexpected page breaks occur
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears.
6 Touch Timeouts.
7 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch
.
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:
1 Lift the scanner unit.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3 Lower the scanner unit.
Troubleshooting
270
Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Blank pages
Checkerboard pattern
Distorted graphics or pictures
Missing characters
Faded print
Dark print
Skewed lines
Smudges
Streaks
Unexpected characters
White lines in print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. If your printer has an ADF, be sure to
clean the ADF scanner glass as well. For more information, see: “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 227.
THE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK
Adjust the copy darkness setting.
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
• Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
• If you previously loaded your original document into the ADF, try loading it on the scanner glass.
UNWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND
• Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.
• Change the Background Removal setting in the Copy Settings menu.
Troubleshooting
271
PATTERNS (MOIRÉ) APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT
• From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo.
• Rotate the original document on the scanner glass.
• From the printer control panel, press the Scale button and adjust the setting.
TEXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING
From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text or Text/Photo.
THE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED
• From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo or Photo.
• From the printer control panel, press the Darkness button and change to a darker setting.
THE PRINT IS SKEWED
Notes:
• If you are loading your original document in the ADF, adjust the ADF paper guides so they touch the edges
of the pages to be scanned.
• Check the paper trays to make sure the guides touch the edges of the loaded paper.
Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Troubleshooting
272
Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:
• The printer is turned on.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
•
•
•
•
The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem
with the scanner.
Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.
Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
Troubleshooting
273
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning
the scanner glass” on page 227.
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Troubleshooting
274
Solving fax problems
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends
on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company
to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
ENABLE THE FAX FUNCTION
For more information, see “Initial fax setup” on page 124.
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
Troubleshooting
275
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone
services can be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN
provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,
contact your DSL provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the
PBX. If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working
correctly.
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending
a fax.
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.
CHECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice
Mail and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.
Troubleshooting
276
Can send but not receive faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers. If you have extension
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then
keep the Ring Delay setting at 4.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.
6 Click Submit.
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
88 Cartridge low appears when the toner is low.
Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper
left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.
Troubleshooting
277
Received fax has poor print quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
RE-SEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address
in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
6 Click Submit.
Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Troubleshooting
278
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option. For more information, see “Updating available options
in the printer driver” on page 54.
Drawers
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Pull the tray completely out.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure the guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Insert the tray.
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Hard disk with adapter
Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Troubleshooting
279
Internal Solutions Port
If the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) does not operate correctly, then these are possible solutions. Try one or more of
the following:
CHECK THE ISP CONNECTIONS
• Make sure the ISP is securely attached to the printer system board.
• Make sure the cable is securely connected to the correct connector.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information about installing software for network printing, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the
multipurpose feeder.
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Troubleshooting
280
Paper trays
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
CHECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY
In the Setup menu, Jam Recovery is set to Off. Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On:
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears.
6 Touch Print Recovery.
7 Touch the right arrow next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch
.
Troubleshooting
281
Solving print quality problems
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not
correct the problem, contact Customer Support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.
Isolating print quality problems
To help isolate print quality problems, print the print quality test pages:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Load Letter- or A4-size paper in the tray.
3 Hold down
and
while turning the printer on.
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears.
6 Touch Print Quality Pages.
The print quality test pages print.
7 Touch Back.
8 Touch Exit Configuration.
Blank pages
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Remove the toner cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the toner cartridge.
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge Low appears, order a new toner cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.
Troubleshooting
282
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PRINT QUALITY SETTINGS
• Change the Print Resolution setting in the Quality menu to 600 dpi, 1200 Image Q, 1200 dpi, or 2400 Image Q.
• Enable Enhance Fine Lines in the Quality menu.
MAKE SURE DOWNLOADED FONTS ARE SUPPORTED
If you are using downloaded fonts, then verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and
the software program.
Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Ghost images
Troubleshooting
283
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Gray background
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:
• From the printer control panel Quality menu, change the setting.
• For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.
Incorrect margins
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
Troubleshooting
284
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Paper curl
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Print irregularities
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Troubleshooting
285
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
CHECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge Low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
THE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the fuser.
Skewed print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
Solid black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT
If the fill pattern is incorrect, choose a different fill pattern from your software program.
Troubleshooting
286
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE
•
•
•
•
Try a different type of paper.
Use only the recommended transparencies.
Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder.
Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or
feeder.
ENSURE THAT THE TONER IS DISTRIBUTED EVENLY WITHIN THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER
Replace the used toner cartridge with a new one.
Print is too light
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting is too light, the Brightness setting is too light, or the Contrast setting is too low.
• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
Troubleshooting
287
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
THE TONER IS LOW
When 88 Cartridge Low appears, order a new toner cartridge.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Print is too dark
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting is too dark, the Brightness setting is too dark, or the Contrast setting is too high.
• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
Troubleshooting
288
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Solid color pages
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER
Replace the used toner cartridge with a new one. If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced.
For more information, contact Customer Support.
Streaked vertical lines
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
Troubleshooting
289
THE TONER IS SMEARED
Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job:
• From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select the Default Source.
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
THE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see.
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Streaked horizontal lines
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE TONER IS SMEARED
Select another tray or feeder to feed the paper for the job:
• From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select the Default Source.
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Troubleshooting
290
THE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see.
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
THE CHARGE ROLLS MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the charge rolls.
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Toner rubs off
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Troubleshooting
291
CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the
tray.
Toner specks
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Troubleshooting
292
Uneven print density
Example
Cause
Solution
Toner cartridge is worn or
defective.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Photoconductor is worn or
defective.
Replace the photoconductor.
Embedded Web Server does not open
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
CHECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS
Depending on the network settings, you may need to type https:// instead of http:// before the printer IP
address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, see your system administrator.
Contacting Technical Support
When you call Technical Support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and the Service Tag number or Express Service Code. For more information,
see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer. The Service Tag number is also listed on the menu settings
page.
For additional technical support, check the Dell Support Web site at support.dell.com.
Troubleshooting
293
Appendix
Dell Technical Support Policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the
troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the Operating System, application software and hardware
drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality
of the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical
support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for
third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or
installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Contacting Dell
You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and
fill in the requested details to access help tools and information.
You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:
• World Wide Web
www.dell.com/
www.dell.com/ap/ (Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp/ (Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
www.dell.com/la/ (Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca (Canada only)
• Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your email address as your password.
• Electronic Support Service
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
[email protected] (Asian/Pacific countries only)
support.jp.dell.com (Japan only)
support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
• Electronic Quote Service
[email protected] (Asian/Pacific countries only)
[email protected] (Canada only)
Appendix
294
Warranty and Return Policy
Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new
in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the
Product Information Guide.
Appendix
295
Index
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 264
290-295.yy scanner jam 265
293 Replace all originals if restarting
job 265
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 266
294 ADF Jam 266
30.yy Invalid refill, change
cartridge 259
31.yy Replace defective or missing
cartridge 260
32.yy Cartridge part number
unsupported by device 260
34 Short paper 260
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 260
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 260
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted 260
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 257
38 Memory full 261
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 261
50 PPDS font error 261
51 Defective flash detected 261
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 261
54 Network <x> software error 262
54 Standard network software
error 262
55 Unsupported option in slot 262
550-sheet drawer
installing 50
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 262
56 Serial port <x> disabled 262
56 Standard USB port disabled 263
56 USB port <x> disabled 263
57 Configuration change, held jobs
were not restored 257
58 Too many flash options
installed 263
58 Too many trays attached 263
59 Incompatible tray <x> 263
61 Remove defective disk 264
62 Disk full 264
63 Unformatted disk 264
80 Routine maintenance
needed 264
84 PC Kit life warning 264
84 Replace PC Kit 264
840.01 Scanner Disabled 266
840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled 266
88 Cartridge low 264
Symbols
“scan to computer” screen
options 154, 155
A
Active NIC menu 165
address book, fax
using 140
ADF
copying using 104
ADF separator rollers, cleaning 228
AppleTalk menu 170
attaching cables 51
B
brightness, adjusting 72
buttons, home screen 24
buttons, printer control panel 23
buttons, touch screen 25
C
cables
Ethernet 51
USB 51
calling Technical Support 293
canceling a job
from Macintosh 102
from the printer control
panel 102
from Windows 102
card stock
loading 80
tips 97
Change <input src> to <Custom
String> 255
Change <input src> to <Custom
Type Name> 254
Change <input src> to <size> 255
Index
296
Change <input src> to <type>
<size> 255
Check tray <x> connection 255
checking an unresponsive
printer 254
checking an unresponsive
scanner 273
checking device status
on Embedded Web Server 238
cleaning
ADF separator rollers 228
exterior of the printer 227
scanner glass 227
Close door or insert cartridge 256
Close front door 256
collating copies 109
color documents
e-mailing 121
Confidential print jobs 98
printing from Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 98
Confidential Print menu 178
configuration information
wireless network 55
configurations
printer 18
Configure MP menu 157
configuring
port settings 65
configuring the e-mail
settings 118
connecting the printer to
answering machine 128
computer modem 134
distinctive ring service 127
regional adapters 130
telephone 128
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 72
Eco-Mode 70
Power Saver 71
Quiet Mode 73
standard exit bin lighting 72
conserving supplies 69
contacting Technical Support 293
control panel, printer 23
copy quality
adjusting 109
improving 116
copy screen
options 113, 114
Copy Settings menu 186
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 270
partial document or photo
copies 272
poor copy quality 271
poor scanned image quality 273
scanner unit does not close 270
copying
adding a date and time
stamp 112
adding an overlay message 112
adjusting quality 109
canceling a copy job 113
collating copies 109
custom job (job build) 111
document containing mixed
paper sizes 107
enlarging 108
from one size to another 106
improving copy quality 116
making transparencies 105
multiple pages on one sheet 110
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 107
pausing a print job to make
copies 111
photos 105
placing separator sheets between
copies 110
quick copy 104
reducing 108
selecting a tray 107
to letterhead 106
using the ADF 104
using the scanner glass
(flatbed) 105
Custom Names menu 162
custom paper type
assigning 86
Custom Scan Sizes menu 162
Custom Type <x>
changing name 86
Custom Types menu 162
D
date and time
setting 136
Default Source menu 157
directory list, printing 101
Disk corrupted 256
display troubleshooting
display is blank 254
display shows only
diamonds 254
display, printer control panel 23
adjusting brightness 72
distinctive ring service
connecting to 127
documents, printing
from Macintosh 95
from Windows 95
Driver Profiler 93
duplexing
copy jobs 107
fax jobs, incoming 142
print jobs 95
E
Eco-Mode setting 70
Embedded Web Server 238
does not open 293
setting up e-mail alerts 238
enlarging a copy 108
envelopes
loading 80
tips 96
environmental settings
brightness, adjusting 72
Eco-Mode 70
Power Saver 71
Quiet Mode 73
standard exit bin lighting 72
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 62
Windows 62
Ethernet port 51
exterior of the printer
cleaning 227
e-mail
canceling 121
enabling 117
notice of low supply level 238
notice of paper jam 238
notice of paper needed 238
Index
297
notice that different paper is
needed 238
e-mail function
setting up 118
e-mail screen
advanced options 123
options 122, 123
E-mail Settings menu 202
e-mailing
adding message line 120
adding subject line 120
changing output file type 121
color documents 121
configuring the e-mail
settings 118
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 118
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 119
e-mail setup 117
setting up e-mail function 118
using shortcut numbers 119
using the address book 120
using the touch screen 119
F
factory defaults, restoring
printer control panel menus 239
fax card
installing 47
fax connection
connecting the printer to the wall
jack 126
connecting to a DSL line 126
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 127
fax connections
answering machine 128
computer modem 134
distinctive ring service 127
regional adapters 130
telephone 128
Fax failed 261
Fax memory full 256
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 192
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 201
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 257
fax quality, improving 145
fax screen
advanced options 144
options 143, 144
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 257
fax troubleshooting
blocking junk faxes 142
caller ID is not shown 275
can receive but not send
faxes 277
can send but not receive
faxes 277
cannot send or receive a fax 275
received fax has poor print
quality 278
faxing
canceling a fax job 143
changing resolution 141
choosing a fax connection 125
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 138, 139
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 139
enabling 135
fax setup 124, 135, 136
forwarding faxes 146
holding faxes 145
improving fax quality 145
making a fax lighter or
darker 141
printing on both sides
(duplexing) 142
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 141
sending using the computer 137
sending using the printer control
panel 137
setting the date and time 136
turning daylight saving time on or
off 136
using shortcuts 140
using the address book 140
viewing a fax log 142
fiber optic
network setup 62
finding
information 17
publications 17
Web site 17
Finishing menu 216
firmware card
installing 34
flash drive 100
Flash Drive menu 210
flash memory card
installing 34
troubleshooting 279
font sample list
printing 101
forwarding faxes 146
FTP
address book 148
FTP quality, improving 151
FTP screen
advanced options 150
options 149, 150
FTP Settings menu 207
G
green settings
brightness, adjusting 72
Eco-Mode 70
Power Saver 71
Quiet Mode 73
standard exit bin lighting 72
guidelines
letterhead 96
transparencies 96
H
hard disk with adapter
troubleshooting 279
held jobs 98
printing from Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 98
Help menu 226
holding faxes 145
home screen
buttons 24
how to set up the printer 55
HTML menu 225
I
Image menu 226
information, finding 17
installation
wireless network 56, 59
installing
options in driver 54
printer software 53
installing printer software
adding options 54
Internal Solutions Port
installing 36
Index
298
troubleshooting 280
Internal Solutions Port, network
changing port settings 65
IPv6 menu 169
J
jams
accessing 240
avoiding 76
understanding messages 240
jams, clearing
200-201 241
202 243
231 244
233 246
234 246
235 247
240–249 247
250 248
251 249
290–294 250
L
labels, paper
tips 97
letterhead
copying to 106
loading 80
tips on using 96
light
standard exit bin 72
light, indicator 23
linking trays 85
Load <input src> with <Custom
String> 258
Load <input src> with <Custom
Type Name> 257
Load <input src> with <size> 258
Load <input src> with <type>
<size> 258
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom
String> 258
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom
Type Name> 258
Load Manual Feeder with
<size> 259
Load Manual Feeder with <type>
<size> 259
loading
multipurpose feeder 80
trays 76
M
Macintosh
wireless network installation 59
memory card
installing 32
troubleshooting 279
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 256
menu settings page
printing 52
menus
Active NIC 165
AppleTalk 170
Confidential Print 178
Configure MP 157
Copy Settings 186
Custom Names 162
Custom Scan Sizes 162
Custom Types 162
Default Source 157
diagram of 156
E-mail Settings 202
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 192
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 201
Finishing 216
Flash Drive 210
FTP Settings 207
Help 226
HTML 225
Image 226
IPv6 169
Miscellaneous 178
NetWare 170
Network <x> 165
Network Card 167
Paper Loading 161
Paper Size/Type 157
Paper Texture 158
Paper Weight 159
Parallel menu 172
PCL Emul 221
PDF 220
PostScript 220
PPDS 223
Quality 218
Reports 163, 166
Security Audit Log 179
Serial <x> 174
Set Date/Time 179
Settings 180
Setup 215
SMTP Setup menu 177
Standard Network 165
Standard USB 171
Substitute Size 157
TCP/IP 167
Universal Setup 163
Utilities 219
Wireless 169
XPS 220
Miscellaneous menu 178
moving the printer 236
multiple pages on one sheet 110
multipurpose feeder
loading 80
N
NetWare menu 170
Network <x> menu 165
Network Card menu 167
network setup page 53
No analog phone line connected to
modem, fax is disabled. 256
noise
reducing 73
O
options
550-sheet drawer 50
fax card 29, 47
firmware card 29, 34
flash memory card 34
internal 29
Internal Solutions Port 29, 36
memory card 29, 32
networking 29
ports 29
printer hard disk 29, 43
options, touch-screen
copy 113, 114
e-mail 122, 123
fax 143, 144
FTP 149, 150
scan to computer 154, 155
ordering supplies
printer attached to a
network 231
printer locally attached to a
computer 231
output file type
changing 121
Index
299
P
paper
characteristics 87
letterhead 88
loading, multipurpose feeder 80
preprinted forms 88
recycled 69
selecting 88
selecting weight 159
setting size 75
setting type 75
storing 89
unacceptable 88
Universal Paper Size 163
Universal size setting 75
paper capacities
trays 91
paper capacity
multipurpose feeder 91
Paper Change: Load Tray<x>
<paper type> 265
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 281
paper jams
accessing jam areas 240
avoiding 76
paper jams, clearing
200-201 241
231 244
233 246
234 246
235 247
240–249 247
250 248
251 249
290–294 250
Paper Loading menu 161
Paper Size/Type menu 157
paper sizes
supported by the printer 89
Paper Texture menu 158
paper type
custom 86
paper types
duplex support 91
supported by printer 91
where to load 91
Paper Weight menu 159
Parallel menu 172
pausing the current print job
to make copies 111
PCL Emul menu 221
PDF menu 220
photoconductor kit
replacing 233
photos
copying 105
port settings
configuring 65
PostScript menu 220
Power Saver
adjusting 71
PPDS menu 223
print job
canceling from Macintosh 102
canceling from Windows 102
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 227
print quality test pages,
printing 101
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 282
characters have jagged
edges 283
clipped images 283
ghost images 283
gray background 284
poor transparency quality 292
print irregularities 285
print is too dark 288
print is too light 287
print quality test pages 282
skewed print 286
solid black streaks 286
solid color pages 289
solid white streaks 286
streaked horizontal lines 290
streaked vertical lines 289
toner fog or background
shading 291
toner rubs off 291
toner specks 292
uneven print density 293
print troubleshooting
held jobs do not print 268
incorrect characters print 269
incorrect margins 284
jammed page does not
reprint 281
job prints from wrong tray 269
job prints on wrong paper 269
job takes longer than
expected 268
jobs do not print 267
Large jobs do not collate 269
multiple-language PDFs do not
print 267
paper curl 285
paper frequently jams 280
tray linking does not work 269
unexpected page breaks
occur 270
printer
configurations 18
minimum clearances 20
models 18
moving 236
selecting a location 20
shipping 237
printer alert utility 93
printer control panel 23
factory defaults, restoring 239
printer hard disk
installing 43
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 264
290-295.yy scanner jam 265
293 Replace all originals if
restarting job 265
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 266
294 ADF Jam 266
30.yy Invalid refill, change
cartridge 259
31.yy Replace defective or missing
cartridge 260
32.yy Cartridge part number
unsupported by device 260
34 Short paper 260
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 260
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 260
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted 260
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 257
38 Memory full 261
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 261
50 PPDS font error 261
51 Defective flash detected 261
Index
300
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 261
54 Network <x> software
error 262
54 Standard network software
error 262
55 Unsupported option in
slot 262
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 262
56 Serial port <x> disabled 262
56 Standard USB port
disabled 263
56 USB port <x> disabled 263
57 Configuration change, held
jobs were not restored 257
58 Too many flash options
installed 263
58 Too many trays attached 263
59 Incompatible tray <x> 263
61 Remove defective disk 264
62 Disk full 264
63 Unformatted disk 264
80 Routine maintenance
needed 264
84 PC Kit life warning 264
84 Replace PC Kit 264
840.01 Scanner Disabled 266
840.02 Scanner Auto
Disabled 266
88 Cartridge low 264
Change <input src> to <Custom
String> 255
Change <input src> to <Custom
Type Name> 254
Change <input src> to
<size> 255
Change <input src> to <type>
<size> 255
Check tray <x> connection 255
Close door or insert cartridge 256
Close front door 256
Disk corrupted 256
Fax failed 261
Fax memory full 256
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 257
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 257
Load <input src> with <Custom
String> 258
Load <input src> with <Custom
Type Name> 257
Load <input src> with <size> 258
Load <input src> with <type>
<size> 258
Load Manual Feeder with
<Custom String> 258
Load Manual Feeder with
<Custom Type Name> 258
Load Manual Feeder with
<size> 259
Load Manual Feeder with <type>
<size> 259
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 256
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 256
Paper Change: Load Tray<x>
<paper type> 265
Remove paper from standard
output bin 259
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 265
Restore Held Jobs? 259
Scan Document Too Long 265
Scanner ADF Cover Open 265
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 256
Some held jobs were not
restored 257
Unsupported disk 259
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 259
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 259
printer options troubleshooting
drawers 279
flash memory card 279
hard disk with adapter 279
Internal Solutions Port 280
memory card 279
option not working 278
paper trays 281
printer problems, solving
basic 254
printing
directory list 101
font sample list 101
from flash drive 100
from Macintosh 95
from Windows 95
installing printer software 53
menu settings page 52
network setup page 53
print quality test pages 101
two-sided (duplex) 95
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from Macintosh computer 99
from Windows 98
publications, finding 17
Q
Quality menu 218
Quiet Mode 73
R
recycled paper
using 69
recycling
Dell products 236
reducing a copy 108
registration
scanner 229
Remove paper from standard
output bin 259
Repeat print jobs 98
printing from Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 98
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 265
replacing
photoconductor kit 233
toner cartridge 231
reports
viewing 239
Reports menu 163, 166
Reserve print jobs 98
printing from Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 98
resolution, fax
changing 141
Restore Held Jobs? 259
S
safety information 15, 16
Scan Document Too Long 265
Scan Profile options 153, 154, 155
scan quality, improving 155
scan to a computer
options 153, 154, 155
Index
301
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a
computer 274
partial document or photo
scans 274
scan was not successful 273
scanner unit does not close 270
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 273
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) 22
functions 21
registration 229
scanner glass 22
Scanner ADF Cover Open 265
scanner glass
cleaning 227
scanner glass (flatbed)
copying using 105
scanning to a computer 152
improving scan quality 155
scanning to a flash drive 153
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 148
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 148
improving FTP quality 151
using shortcut numbers 147
using the address book 148
using the keypad 147
Security Audit Log menu 179
Serial <x> menu 174
serial port 67
serial printing
setting up 67
Set Date/Time menu 179
setting
paper size 75
paper type 75
TCP/IP address 167
Universal Paper Size 75
setting up
serial printing 67
setting up the printer
on a wired network
(Macintosh) 62
on a wired network
(Windows) 62
Settings menu 180
Setup menu 215
shipping the printer 237
shortcuts, creating
e-mail 118, 119
fax destination 138, 139
FTP destination 148
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 256
SMTP Setup menu 177
software
Driver Profiler 93
printer alert utility 93
Status Monitor Center 93
Some held jobs were not
restored 257
standard exit bin
light 72
Standard Network menu 165
Standard USB menu 171
Status Monitor Center 93
status of supplies, checking 230
steps
setting up printer 55
storing
paper 89
supplies 230
subject and message information
adding to e-mail 120
Substitute Size menu 157
supplies
conserving 69
status of 230
storing 230
system board
accessing 30
T
TCP/IP menu 167
tips
card stock 97
envelopes 96
labels, paper 97
letterhead 96
toner cartridge
replacing 231
touch screen
buttons 25
transparencies
loading 80
making 105
tips on using 96
tray linking 86
tray unlinking 86
trays
linking 85, 86
loading 76
unlinking 85, 86
troubleshooting
checking an unresponsive
printer 254
checking an unresponsive
scanner 273
contacting Technical
Support 293
solving basic printer
problems 254
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 270
partial document or photo
copies 272
poor copy quality 271
poor scanned image quality 273
scanner unit does not close 270
troubleshooting, display
display is blank 254
display shows only
diamonds 254
troubleshooting, fax
blocking junk faxes 142
caller ID is not shown 275
can receive but not send
faxes 277
can send but not receive
faxes 277
cannot send or receive a fax 275
received fax has poor print
quality 278
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 281
troubleshooting, print
held jobs do not print 268
incorrect characters print 269
incorrect margins 284
jammed page does not
reprint 281
job prints from wrong tray 269
job prints on wrong paper 269
job takes longer than
expected 268
jobs do not print 267
Large jobs do not collate 269
multiple-language PDFs do not
print 267
paper curl 285
Index
302
paper frequently jams 280
tray linking does not work 269
unexpected page breaks
occur 270
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 282
characters have jagged
edges 283
clipped images 283
ghost images 283
gray background 284
poor transparency quality 292
print irregularities 285
print is too dark 288
print is too light 287
print quality test pages 282
skewed print 286
solid black streaks 286
solid color pages 289
solid white streaks 286
streaked horizontal lines 290
streaked vertical lines 289
toner fog or background
shading 291
toner rubs off 291
toner specks 292
uneven print density 293
troubleshooting, printer options
drawers 279
flash memory card 279
hard disk with adapter 279
Internal Solutions Port 280
memory card 279
option not working 278
paper trays 281
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a
computer 274
partial document or photo
scans 274
scan was not successful 273
scanner unit does not close 270
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 273
U
Universal Paper Size
setting 75
Universal Setup menu 163
unlinking trays 85
Unsupported disk 259
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 259
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 259
USB port 51
Utilities menu 219
V
Verify print jobs 98
printing from Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 98
viewing
reports 239
W
Web site
finding 17
Windows
wireless network installation 56
wired network setup
using Windows 62
wired networking
using Macintosh 62
Wireless menu 169
wireless network
configuration information 55
installation, using Macintosh 59
installation, using Windows 56
X
XPS menu 220
Index
303
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement